JP2018011875A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a technique capable of enhancing interest in a performance using a touch sensor module.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a display device including a display part; and a touch sensor module that is provided while overlapping with at least one portion of the display part and detects touch input information. The game machine acquires touch coordinates based on the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module, displays a predetermined image in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates, calculates an angle of a line for connecting the touch coordinates and goal coordinates to a line nearly vertical to one side of the display part near the goal coordinates, and displays video, where the predetermined image advances toward the goal coordinates based on the angle. A predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined appearance-time mode in a predetermined area until a predetermined period passes after detection of touch input information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 140

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A general gaming machine includes a cabinet and a front door attached to the cabinet so as to be opened and closed. The front door is provided with a plurality of effect devices such as a lamp unit, a speaker, a display device, and a touch sensor module. As a touch sensor module, a coordinate detection device is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  The touch sensor module mounted on the gaming machine is provided so as to overlap with the display unit of the display device, for example. In a gaming machine equipped with such a touch sensor module, the player can directly touch the display unit of the display device to perform an intuitive input operation. Further, by adopting the surface-type capacitance method as the touch sensor module, an input device using the touch sensor can be manufactured at a low cost with a simple configuration.

  As a gaming machine equipped with a touch sensor module, there is known a gaming machine that determines the content of an effect based on the detected position when the position touched by the player is detected by the touch sensor module (for example, Patent Document 2). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, it is possible to select an effect performed in the following game by touching a desired selection image during a period in which a plurality of selection images are displayed.

JP 2009-277047 A JP 2009-261605 A

  However, there is room for improvement in the effect using the touch sensor module, and it is desired to improve the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of improving the interest of production using a touch sensor module.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit of the display device and detects touch input information;
A gaming machine comprising
Touch coordinates are acquired based on the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module, a predetermined image (for example, a black eyelid image 354 described later) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates, and goal coordinates ( For example, an angle of a line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates with respect to a line substantially perpendicular to one side of the display unit (for example, an upper side of the display unit 11a described later) near the center of the decoration unit 321 described later. And displaying a video in which the predetermined image advances toward the goal coordinates based on the angle,
The predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined appearance mode (for example, a circular shape described later) in the predetermined area until a predetermined period elapses after the touch input information is detected. Gaming machine.

  In the present invention having the above-described configuration, even if any point is touched, an image that advances from the touch coordinates toward the goal coordinates can be displayed. In addition, since the predetermined image is displayed in a low appearance area including the touch coordinates in a predetermined appearance mode, it is possible to make it appear as if the predetermined image has appeared from the finger, improving the interest of the production using the touch sensor module Can be made.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the example of an external appearance structure in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an internal structure of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention, with a front door being opened. It is a top view which shows the display apparatus in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the touch sensor module attached to the display apparatus in the gaming machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the gaming machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the sub control circuit in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the touch sensor relay circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table | surface at the time of the bonus action | operation in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general gaming states in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming states in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 game states in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 game states in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 game states in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 1) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 2) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 3) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for a small combination and replay in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for spinning cylinder stops in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 1) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 2) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of forward pressing in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward press in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward pressing in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table at the time of an irregular pressing in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table selection table in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area | region in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the action | operation stop button storage area | region in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order data storage area in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow figure of RT state of the gaming machine in the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and stop order in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the corresponding table | surface of the winning combination, stop order, and RT transfer in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ (chance zone) lottery table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in addition lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in occurrence lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table on G number in BB of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table in BB of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR lottery table in BB of the game machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR1 continuous lottery table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR2 continuous lottery table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition lottery table during BR of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of additional addition in BR and promotion lottery table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table for additional addition A of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the extra game number lottery table for additional addition B of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition C of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 1) of the game machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 2) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 3) of the game machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 4) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 5) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 6) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 7) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 8) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 9) of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary causal value lottery table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal point lottery table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value stock lottery table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operating condition table of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub storage area of the game machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock process at the time of the game start in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order storage process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority attraction | suction control process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of the main CPU in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by the sub CPU in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production registration task performed by the sub CPU in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of start command reception in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process during pseudo | simulation bonus in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BR continuation time process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BR continuation determination time process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process during normal in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the causal value related process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in preparation in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery process in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the reel stop command reception in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the no-operation command reception in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the alerting | reporting effect of the additional game number of ART using the touch input part in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the selection effect of the addition game number of ART using the touch input part in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the selection effect of the addition game number of ART using the touch input part in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 1) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 2) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 3) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 4) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 5) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 6) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 7) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 8) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 9) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 10) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 11) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 12) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 13) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 14) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the usage example (the 15) of the portable terminal cooperation function in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock process at the time of the game start in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state suggestion touch effect which used the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the presence or absence of the response effect according to the display target object and state suggestion precision in the gaming machine of the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state suggestion precision predetermined according to the state to suggest in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and appearance magnification. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state suggestion precision predetermined according to the state to suggest in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, an appearance probability, and an expectation degree. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suction effect which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suction effect which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suction effect which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display method of the image | video of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display method of the image | video of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display method of the image | video of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the moving route | root of the suction object display of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the moving route | root of the suction object display of the suction effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the expansion effect using the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the expansion effect using the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows notification BGM selection production using the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of notification BGM selection production using the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of notification BGM selection production using the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the expansion effect which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the input determination area | region of the expansion effect which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is expanding the expansion | swelling object image of the expansion effect which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which expanded the expansion object image of the expansion effect which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention to the left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which expanded the expansion object image of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention to the right side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the expansion width of the expansion object image of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and the number of additional games of ART. It is a graph which shows the relationship between the expansion width of the expansion object image of the expansion effect using the touch input part in the gaming machine of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention, and the number of additional games of ART. It is explanatory drawing which shows the visibility fall efficiency centering on the touch coordinate which concerns on the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the visibility fall efficiency which concerns on the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the scratch production which uses the touch input part in the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the additional alerting | reporting effect in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st modification of the additional alerting | reporting effect in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd modification of the additional alerting | reporting effect in the gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

1. First Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachislot machine that is a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of replay is displayed when an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and a specific symbol combination is displayed. A pachislot machine having a function of an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) that simultaneously operates with a function of operating a replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”), which is a gaming state that is higher than usual, will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to the medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as paying out medals, re-games, bonuses, etc. are given to players, and other so-called “loses”. Is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is responsible for a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 1 symbol.

  The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the symbol combination display related to the winning is determined, normally, the symbol combination is put on the effective line within a specified time of 190 msec (4 symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means is defined for one or more reels when, for example, a challenge bonus (CB), which is a second-type special accessory, and a middle bonus (MB) for continuously operating the CB are operated. The reel rotation is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed along the effective line as much as possible within 75 msec (one frame of symbols). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the active line. Let

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. This winning determination means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that it is related to winning, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game.

  Further, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of flows, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is carried out by a sub-control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity, such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when determining whether there is a winning. In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player has the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that can be put on by the carrier when carrying the pachi-slot 1. The cabinet 2a may be referred to as a “fixed frame” and the front door 2b may be referred to as a “door body”, and the exterior body 2 may be configured by the “fixed frame” and the “door body”.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot 1.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and executes an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes three display windows 4L (left display window), 4C (middle display window), and 4R (right display window) for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, respectively. A display unit (display screen) 11 a including the display window unit 4 is provided. In the present embodiment, the entire display unit 11a including the display window unit 4 is used to display an image and execute an effect. The liquid crystal display device 11 shows a specific example of the display device according to the present invention.

  Each display window is formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. Each of the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R is provided at a position overlapping with the arrangement area of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (game) It is provided so that it may be located in the person side. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are arranged in succession among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R is stopped. It is set to a size that can display two symbols. That is, in the frame of each display window, there are provided upper, middle and lower areas where the corresponding reel symbols are displayed, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In this embodiment, a line connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L (display window 4L), the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C (display window 4C), and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R (display window 4R) is awarded. It is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door main body 9 and the size thereof is set to cover the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is disposed so as to overlap the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and has a decorative frame 100 in which two panel openings 100a and 100b for exposing the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 are formed. And a transparent protective cover (not shown) that closes the panel openings 100a and 100b of the decorative frame 100.

  The decorative frame 100 includes a partition piece 112 provided at the boundary between the panel opening 100a and the panel opening 100b. That is, the two panel openings 100a and 100b are partitioned by the partition piece 112 so as to be aligned in the vertical direction. The panel opening 100 a of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. The panel opening 100b of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display unit 11a and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The decoration frame 100 is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 21 and a decoration unit 121. The LED group 21 turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the production contents. The movable decorative unit 121 is disposed on the right side of the panel opening 100a in the decorative frame 100, and has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) (not shown). The movable decoration unit 121 lights up with a color and a light emission pattern corresponding to the contents of the effects when a special effect and a predetermined effect are performed.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with various devices (medal slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) that are to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 13 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 13 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited in the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number used for one game from medals deposited in the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The pedestal 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 23 made up of 7-segment LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). The 7-segment display 23 has information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the paid-out number), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Is digitally displayed.

  At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout port 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout port 18 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 43 described later to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 18. In addition, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the production contents.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the pachislot 1.

  The cabinet 2a has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in which one surface on the front side is opened. A main control board 41 constituting the main control circuit 91 is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls main operations of the game in the pachislot 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of presence / absence of a prize, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. The three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the stepping motor show a specific example of the variable display device according to the present invention.

  In the lower part of the cabinet 2a, a medal payout device 43 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device 43) having a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided. In the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 44 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 43 (on the left side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front).

  Further, in the cabinet 2a, a medal auxiliary storage 45 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 43 (right side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front). The medal auxiliary storage 45 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 43. The medal auxiliary storage 45 is engaged with the bottom surface of the cabinet 2a and is detachably attached to the cabinet 2a.

  A sub-control board 42 constituting a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9) to be described later is provided on the upper portion of the front door 2b on the back side (the part opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later.

  Furthermore, a selector 46 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 46 is a device for selecting whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 13 is appropriate, and guides the medal determined to be appropriate to the hopper device 43. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor that detects that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 46. This medal sensor shows a specific example of the insertion operation detecting means according to the present invention.

[Display device and touch sensor module]
Next, the configuration of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit 11a and a frame unit 11b that surrounds the display unit 11a. The surface shape of the display unit 11a is a horizontally long rectangle, and the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R described above are provided in the lower part of the rectangular surface of the display unit 11a. The frame part 11b is provided so as to surround the four sides of the display part 11a.

  The touch sensor module 31 is disposed on one side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a (the side opposite to the display window 4C). That is, the touch sensor module 31 is disposed near the lower right corner in the rectangular surface of the display unit 11a. When the front panel 10 includes a transparent or translucent cover that covers the display unit 11a, the touch sensor module 31 is arranged on the surface of the display unit 11a that faces the display unit 11a of the transparent or translucent cover. You may arrange | position in the area | region facing the lower right corner vicinity.

  FIG. 5 is a plan view of the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor module 31 of the present embodiment is a surface capacitive touch sensor, and includes a sensor unit 32, a flexible printed circuit board 33, and a touch sensor IC (Integrated Circuit) 34 as shown in FIG. Prepare.

  The sensor unit 32 is configured by a plate-like sensor whose surface shape is a vertically long rectangle. The sensor unit 32 includes a transparent substrate 35 having a rectangular surface 35a, electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c and a transparent conductive film provided on one surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35, and electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c and a protective cover (not shown) provided to cover the transparent conductive film. Examples of the material for forming the transparent substrate 35 include glass. The protective cover is made of a transparent material.

  The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are disposed on the outer edge portion of the transparent substrate 35, and the transparent conductive film is formed on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in a region surrounded by the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c. The The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c are electrically connected to the transparent conductive film.

  The electrode pattern 36a is composed of an electrode film having a film surface shape that is substantially T-shaped. Specifically, the electrode pattern 36a extends from one side of the transparent substrate 35 (long side on the side not facing the display window 4R) and from the center of the extension. It is comprised with the protrusion part which protruded toward the flexible printed circuit board 33 side. Then, the protruding portion of the electrode pattern 36 a is electrically connected to the flexible printed board 33.

  The electrode pattern 36b is configured by an electrode film having a substantially L-shaped film surface. Specifically, the electrode pattern 36b includes a lower side extending portion extending along the lower side portion of the transparent substrate 35, and the vicinity of the protruding portion of the electrode pattern 36a from the end portion of the lower side extending portion on the flexible printed circuit 33 side. It is comprised by the side extension part extended along the one side part of the transparent substrate 35 to the position (position which does not contact a protrusion part). In addition, the side extension part of the electrode pattern 36b is arrange | positioned at the flexible printed circuit board 33 side of the extension part of the electrode pattern 36a, and the extension part of the side extension part of the electrode pattern 36b and the electrode pattern 36a is a figure. As shown in FIG. 4, it is arranged at a position overlapping with a part of the right side part of the frame part 11b in the formation surface (a position facing a part of the right side part of the frame part 11b in the film thickness direction). Moreover, the lower side extension part of the electrode pattern 36b is arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with a part of lower side part of the frame part 11b in the formation surface. And the front-end | tip part of the side extension part of the electrode pattern 36b is electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33. FIG.

  The electrode pattern 36c is composed of an electrode film having a substantially L-shaped film surface. Specifically, the electrode pattern 36c includes an upper side extending portion extending along the upper side portion of the transparent substrate 35, and the vicinity of the protruding portion of the electrode pattern 36a from the end portion of the upper side extending portion on the flexible printed circuit 33 side. It is comprised by the side extension part extended along the one side part of the transparent substrate 35 to the position (position which does not contact a protrusion part). The side extension portion of the electrode pattern 36c is disposed on the flexible printed circuit board 33 side of the extension portion of the electrode pattern 36a, and the side extension portion of the electrode pattern 36c and the extension portion of the electrode pattern 36a are In the forming surface, the film is arranged at a position overlapping with a part of the right side part of the frame part 11b (position facing a part of the right side part of the frame part 11b in the film thickness direction). And the front-end | tip part of the side extension part of the electrode pattern 36c is electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33. FIG.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, no electrode is provided on the other side portion (long side portion facing the display window 4 </ b> R) of the transparent substrate 35.

  The flexible printed circuit board 33 is connected to one side edge of the transparent substrate 35 (long edge on the side not facing the display window 4R) and has a connector 33a. The connector 33a is connected to a touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7 to be described later). Electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33. Further, a touch sensor IC 34 is mounted on the flexible printed board 33.

  A uniform electric field is generated on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in the sensor unit 32. When a finger touches the surface 35a (protective cover) of the transparent substrate 35, the state (distribution) of the electric field on the surface 35a is changed. Change. Thereby, a weak current flows through each of the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c, and each current is output to the touch sensor IC 34. The touch sensor IC 34 detects the position touched by the finger based on the value of current input from each of the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c.

  FIG. 6 is a plan view of the front door 2b as seen from the front (player side). As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is exposed at the openings 100 a and 100 b of the front panel 10. And the touch sensor module 31 is arrange | positioned at one side part (right side in the example shown in FIG. 6) of the display window 4R in the display part 11a. Thereby, the touch input part 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is comprised in one side part of the display window 4R in the display part 11a.

  As described above, the electrode patterns 36a and 36b formed on the sensor part 32 (see FIG. 5) of the touch sensor module 31 overlap with a part of the frame part 11b in the electrode formation surface (in the film thickness direction, (Position facing a part of the frame portion 11b). That is, when viewed from the front (player side), the electrode patterns 36 a and 36 b are covered with the front panel 10. Further, as described above, the side extension portion of the electrode pattern 36c that extends along one side portion of the transparent substrate 35 overlaps with a part of the frame portion 11b in the electrode formation surface (film). It is arranged at a position facing a part of the frame portion 11b) in the thickness direction. Furthermore, the upper side extension part extended along the upper side part of the transparent substrate 35 of the electrode pattern 36c overlaps with the frame part 11b in the electrode formation surface (position facing the frame part 11b in the film thickness direction). Although it is not disposed on the front panel 10, the front panel 10 is covered with the partition piece 112.

  That is, the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are covered with the front panel 10 when viewed from the front (player side). Further, no electrode pattern is formed on the side portion (left side portion) of the display window 4 </ b> R of the sensor unit 32 in the touch sensor module 31.

  Thereby, the electrode pattern of the touch sensor module 31 can be prevented from appearing at the boundary between the region where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the region where the touch input unit 31a is not provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the boundary between the area where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the area where the touch input unit 31a is not provided.

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot 1.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control board 41 disposed in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 disposed in the front door 2b. The main control board 41 is electrically connected to the reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power board 44 b of the power supply device 44. The

  The reel relay terminal board 51 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel. The reel relay terminal board 51 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel, and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or when checking the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The cabinet side relay board 53 is electrically connected to the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The external concentration terminal board 56 is attached to the cabinet 2 a and is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot 1. Since the hopper device 43 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage 45. This medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 45 is full of medals.

  A power switch 44 a is connected to the power board 44 b of the power device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachi-slot 1.

  Connected to the door relay terminal board 54 are a medal sensor (not shown), a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66 and a sub relay board 67. Is done. That is, the medal sensor, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the checkout switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub relay board 67 are mainly controlled via the door relay terminal board 54. Connected to the substrate 41.

  The medal sensor detects that the medal has passed through the selector 46 and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1BET button 15 (see FIG. 2) are pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. This start switch 64 shows a specific example of the start operation detecting means according to the present invention.

  The stop switch board 65 includes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. Therefore, the stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch is a specific example of the stop operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed (stop operation) by the player.

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 23 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. Therefore, the 7-segment display 23 and the LED 69 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 69 lights, for example, a mark for displaying the start of a game or a mark for performing a replay.

  The sub relay board 67 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. The sub relay board 67 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub control board 42 and a plurality of boards disposed around the sub control board 42. That is, the sub control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 are electrically connected to the sub relay board 67.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub relay board 67. The sub control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 via the sub relay board 67. .

  The sound I / O board 71 outputs sound to the speakers 20L and 20R. The LED board 72 displays the blinking pattern by causing the LED group 21 showing a specific example of the light source to emit light according to the contents of the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9 described later).

  The touch sensor relay board 73 transmits input information related to the touch operation output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub-control circuit 101. The circuit configuration of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 stores opening / closing history information of the front door 2b. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101) when the front door 2b is opened.

  A ROM cartridge substrate 76 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 77 are connected to the sub control substrate 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing production image (video), sound, light (LED group 21) and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 77 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 41. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98 and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel. It is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is basically determined for four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbols of the left reel 3L displayed in the middle area of the display window 4L and the symbols within the range up to four symbols ahead are displayed on the display window 4L. The symbol can be stopped in the middle area.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 101 mounted on the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. Various programs for executing are included. In addition, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of video by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined contents of the effect, and a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by the light source such as the LED group 21. Also included are various programs for executing a voice control task for controlling the sound output from the speakers 20L, 20R.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the content of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 20L and 20R to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 21 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

<Touch sensor relay circuit>
Next, the configuration of the touch sensor relay circuit 151 mounted on the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the touch sensor relay circuit 151. As shown in FIG. 10, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 is electrically connected to the sub relay board 67 and the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor relay circuit 151 determines an operation command and XY coordinate data based on touch input information and operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31, and transmits the operation command and XY coordinate data to the sub control circuit 101 via the sub relay board 67. To do.

The touch sensor relay circuit 151 basically includes a touch sensor LSI (Large Scale Integration) 152, connectors 153 and 154, regulators 155 and 156, a sub control reception buffer 157 and a sub control transmission buffer 158.

  The touch sensor LSI 152 is connected to a connector 154, a regulator 155, a sub control reception buffer 157, and a sub control transmission buffer 158. The sub control reception buffer 157 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 155, and the sub control transmission buffer 158 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 156.

  The connector 153 is electrically connected to the connector 131 mounted on the sub relay board 67. Further, the connector 154 is electrically connected to the above-described connector 33a of the touch sensor module 31.

  The sub control board 42 and the sub relay board 67 show a specific example of the effect control board according to the present invention, and the sub control circuit 101 shows a specific example of the effect control circuit according to the present invention.

  The regulator 155 converts the 12V DC voltage supplied via the connector 153 into a 3.3V DC voltage, and supplies the 3.3V DC voltage to the touch sensor LSI 152, the connector 154, and the sub-control reception buffer 157. To do. The regulator 156 converts the 12V DC voltage supplied via the connector 153 into a 5V DC voltage and supplies the 5V DC voltage to the sub-control transmission buffer 158.

  The sub control reception buffer 157 temporarily stores the transmission data from the sub control circuit 101 received by the connector 153 as reception data (RXD). Then, the sub-control reception buffer 157 outputs the stored reception data to the touch sensor LSI 152.

  The touch sensor LSI 152 represents the type of player's operation on the touch input unit 31a (see FIG. 6) of the touch sensor module 31 based on the touch input information supplied from the touch sensor module 31 via the connector 154. Determine various operation commands. The touch sensor LSI 152 determines XY coordinate data based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31.

  The sub-control transmission buffer 158 stores various operation commands and XY coordinate data output from the touch sensor LSI 152. Then, the sub-control transmission buffer 158 transmits the stored various operation commands and XY coordinate data as transmission data (TXD) to the sub-control circuit 101 via the connector 153.

  In the present embodiment, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 determines the operation type and the XY coordinates based on the information related to the touch operation of the player output from the touch sensor module 31. Such processing can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the sub control circuit 101 in the pachislot machine 1 on which the touch sensor module 31 is mounted.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 11) that specifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, “0” corresponding to the symbol counter in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (the direction from symbol position “20” in FIG. 11 toward symbol position “0”) with reference to symbol position “0”. ... "20" is assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

  That is, by referring to the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table, they are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the frame of the display window 4. The type of design can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “8”, the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the display window 4L are respectively “ Symbols corresponding to “watermelon”, “red 7” at symbol position “8”, and “bell 1” at symbol position “7” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table defines a correspondence relationship between a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and a payout number.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. It is determined that the prize is won. When it is determined that a prize is won, the player is given benefits such as medal payout and replay operation. In addition, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “lost”. That is, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the item “losing” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “losing”.

  Various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  The “storage area” data in the display combination column is data for designating a later-described display combination storage area (see FIG. 41 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and having different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the “paid-out number” data, the same number of medals are paid out.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and any one of “C_13_BEL_A” to “C_13_BEL_AP” is determined as the display combination, A payout is made. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and when any of “C_14_BEL_A” to “C_14_BEL_L” is determined as the display combination, 14 medals are paid out. Done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”, which are display combinations related to replay (replay) as display combinations. “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”, “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I”, “C_CD_REP_I”,
When any one of “A” to “C_Koyama_REP_F” and “C_Small V_REP_A” to “C_Small V_REP_C” is determined, the replay (replay) is activated.

  Note that the display combinations related to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” shown in FIG. 15 may be displayed when the display combinations related to “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D” could not be established (missed). It is a role. The display combinations related to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” are display combinations that are triggered when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later.

[Bonus operating table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table is stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42 described later) provided in the main RAM 95, a bonus end number counter, a game possible number counter, and a winning number counter when a bonus operation is performed. Specify the data to be used.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game to be operated. In this embodiment, a middle bonus and a challenge bonus are provided as bonus game types. The middle bonus is referred to as an accessory continuous operation device related to a so-called second type special accessory, and is hereinafter referred to as “MB”. The challenge bonus is called a so-called type 2 special bonus and is hereinafter referred to as “CB”. During the operation period of “MB”, the operation of “CB” is continuously performed.

  The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the number of medals paid out exceeds a specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, the operations of “MB1” and “MB2” that are started when “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” is displayed are ended when medals exceeding the prescribed number “13” are paid out.

  The game possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be performed in the operation of “CB”, that is, the so-called possible number of games. The operation of “CB” ends when one game is performed.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence relationship between the RT gaming state transition conditions and the transition source and destination RT gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, five types of RT0 gaming states to RT4 gaming states are provided as RT gaming states, which are different in internal winning combination of replay and their winning probabilities. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the fact that the symbol combination relating to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (the predetermined display combination is established) is the RT game. It becomes a transition condition between states.

  Specifically, when the display combination relating to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_A”, “C_CU_REP_A”, and “C_CU_REP_B” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state.

  Further, when the display combination relating to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, when the display combination related to “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z” and “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state.

When the display combination relating to “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. And "C_
When the display combination related to "ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" is established, the RT gaming state is RT
Transition to the 0 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. For details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state, More specific description will be given later with reference to FIG.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines a correspondence relationship between the gaming state, the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table, and the number of lotteries.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the general gaming state (MB gaming state), the general gaming state internal lottery table is used, and “42” is set as the number of lotteries. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state, all small combinations (internal winning combinations relating to the payout of medals) are determined as internal winning combinations. In other words, the bits related to all small combinations in the internal winning combination storing area described later are turned on. When the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state, the winning of “MB1” and “MB2” is invalidated.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, the general lottery state internal lottery table is used even when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the internal lottery table used when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state is different from the internal lottery table used when the gaming state is the general gaming state. It is good also as a structure to provide.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, an internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer associated with the winning number in each RT gaming state and the lottery value when each winning number is determined. .

  The small combination / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer are data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and will be described later as an internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28 described later). This is data for designating the internal winning combination defined by.

  In the internal lottery processing of the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. Then, an internal lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” is generated). In other words, the winning number when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digit” occurs) is won, and the data point assigned to the winning number is acquired.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which it is assigned is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

  FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0) is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, and shows the correspondence between lottery values assigned to the winning numbers 1 to 42 and data pointers. Stipulate.

  In the present embodiment, lottery values are defined according to the settings 1 to 6, respectively. These settings 1 to 6 are provided in order to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles at the game shop side. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key type switch 52 are used. Be changed.

  For example, referring to the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0), the probability that the winning number “1” (abbreviation “F_NMLRP1”) in setting 6 is 7000/65536. When the winning number “1” is won, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer. Note that “1” in the small role / replay data pointer corresponds to the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” (see FIG. 26 described later).

  In the internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0), the winning numbers “12” (abbreviated “F_R1_R2_KP”), “13” (abbreviated “F_R1_KP_R2”), “19” (abbreviated “F_KP_R4_R2_1”) to “22” ( The lottery value of the abbreviation “F_KP_R2_R4_2” is “0”. Therefore, when referring to the internal gaming state internal lottery table (RT0), the winning numbers “12”, “13”, and “19” to “22” are not won.

  The small role / replay data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers “12”, “13”, “19” to “22” are “12”, “13”, “19” to “22”, respectively. Internal winning combinations common to the small combination / replay data pointers are internal winning combinations relating to the abbreviations “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” is not determined, and the RT0 gaming state is not shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers “1” to “24”, respectively. When the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, lottery values defined in the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) (see FIG. 19) are set. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is changed to lottery values defined for the winning numbers “1” to “24”.

For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “19” and “21” are “3750”, respectively. As described above, when any of the small role / replay data pointers “19” to “22” defined for the winning numbers “19” to “22” is acquired, the abbreviations “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are obtained. ”Will be determined. Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, the abbreviation “C_CD_REP_A” ˜
There is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and the RT gaming state is R
There is a case where a transition is made from the T1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers “1” to “24”, respectively. When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0) (see FIG. 19) are RT2 The lottery values specified for the winning numbers “1” to “24” of the game state internal lottery table are changed.

  For example, in the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “14” and “16” are “10000”, and the lottery values of the winning numbers “15” and “17” are “6000”, respectively. It is. The lottery value of the winning number “18” is “10846”.

  When any of the small role / replay data pointers “14” to “18” defined according to the winning numbers “14” to “18” is acquired, the abbreviations “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” Any of the internal winning combinations related to “C_SBB_D” is determined (see FIG. 25 described later). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” may be determined, and the RT gaming state is RT2 There is a case where a transition is made from the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers “1” to “24”, respectively. When the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0) (see FIG. 19) are RT3. The lottery values specified for the winning numbers “1” to “24” of the game state internal lottery table are changed.

  For example, in the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “20” and “22” are “5000”, respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers “23” and “24” are “8000”, respectively. It is. When any of the small role / replay data pointers “20” and “22” to “24” defined according to the winning numbers “20” and “22” to “24” is acquired, the abbreviation “C_ Internal winning combinations related to “small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” are determined in common (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, any of the internal winning combinations related to the abbreviations “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” may be determined, and the RT gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state. There is a case of transition to the RT4 gaming state.

  Further, when the small role / replay data pointers “20” and “22” defined in accordance with the winning numbers “20” and “22” are acquired, the internal winning combinations relating to the abbreviations “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are obtained. Are commonly determined (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined in common, and the RT gaming state shifts from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Sometimes.

  FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state. This RT4 gaming state internal lottery table is a table referred to in the RT4 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers “1” to “24”. When the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the lottery values defined for the winning numbers “1” to “24” in the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) (see FIG. 19) are RT4. The lottery values specified for the winning numbers “1” to “24” of the game state internal lottery table are changed.

  For example, in the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “12” and “13” are “13000”, respectively. When the small combination / replay data pointers “12” and “13” defined according to the winning numbers “12” and “13” are acquired, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” is common. (See FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” may be determined, and the RT gaming state shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. There are things to do.

  Further, when the small role / replay data pointers “12” and “13” defined in accordance with the winning numbers “12” and “13” are acquired, the internal winning combinations relating to the abbreviations “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are obtained. Are commonly determined (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and the RT gaming state shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. There are things to do.

  The winning numbers “28” to “33” in the RT0 gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. 19 may be won in any gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Each value is “2930”. When the small role / replay data pointers “28” to “33” defined according to the winning numbers “28” to “33” are acquired, the internal winning combinations relating to the abbreviations “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” are common. (See FIG. 28 described later).

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” may be determined in any gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, the RT gaming state may transition to the RT0 gaming state regardless of whether the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, or the RT4 gaming state.

[Internal winning combination determination table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely determined.

  The “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table is for identifying a combination of symbols that allows display along the effective lines set over the display areas of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It is data of. The “internal winning combination” is represented by 1-byte data in the same way as the “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, and is a unique symbol for each bit in the 1-byte data. Are assigned. The “O” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer.

  When the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are “0”, the content of the “internal winning combination” is “losing”, which is the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. Indicates that display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

  FIG. 24 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines an internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game with respect to “1” of the bonus data pointer. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 24, for example, when “1” is acquired as the bonus data pointer, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” is won.

  25 to 28 show a small combination / replay internal winning combination determination table. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combination relating to the small winning combination and replay (replay) for each of the small winning combination / replay data pointers “1” to “42”. That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

  For example, when “17” is acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, the abbreviated names “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_C_REP”, “C_Koyama_REP_A” to “C_” are used as internal winning combinations. The internal winning combination related to “Oyama_REP_F” is won in duplicate. In addition, when “18” is acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, the abbreviated names “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_ Internal winning combinations related to “Oyama_REP_A” to “C_Oyama_REP_F” and “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” are won in duplicate.

[Cylinder stop number selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table will be described. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The rotation stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

  The spinning cylinder stop number selection table of this embodiment defines a different spinning cylinder stop number for each data pointer. For example, when the data pointer for the small role / replay is “3”, the spinning stop number “3” is selected. When the bonus data pointer is “1”, the spinning stop number “67” is selected.

  29 in the spinning stop number selection table shown in FIG. 29 is in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state), and the small role / replay data pointer is “0” or “25 to 41”. In this case, the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number is shown. In this case, the rotating cylinder stop number “42” is selected. 29 in the spinning stop number selection table shown in FIG. 29 indicates the correspondence between the data pointer and the spinning stop number in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state). For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “1” during the MB gaming state, the spinning stop number “43” is selected.

  In addition, although the number selection table for rotation stop of this embodiment prescribes | regulates a different rotation stop number for every data pointer for small roles and replays, this invention is not limited to this. In the spinning stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same spinning stop number may be defined for different small role / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initial setting table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines a correspondence relationship between the rotation stop number and various data used in a pull-in priority table selection process described later and a number of sliding pieces determination process of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes the rotation stop number, the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the forward push table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push push The correspondence relationship between the table change initial data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is defined.

  The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used for the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, in the reel stop initial setting table, if a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is defined, the pull-in priority table number defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37 described later) is set. Data regarding the priority order of the corresponding display combination can be acquired.

  In addition, in the reel stop initial setting table, if the drawing priority table number corresponding to the turn stop number is not defined, the drawing priority table is referred to with reference to the drawing priority table selection table (see FIG. 36 described later). A pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table selection table number is determined.

  The forward selection table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push table change initial data designate a stop table (see FIGS. 32 to 34 described later) to be referred to when the forward push is performed. It is data for. The “forward push” in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L. Corresponds to the order of pressing “Right” and “Middle”.

  The irregular selection table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 35 described later) to be referred to when irregular selection is performed. In this embodiment, “anomalous push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is “middle left / right”, “middle right / left”, “middle right”. This corresponds to the pressing order of “left” and “middle right”.

  In this embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the reel stop control is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel stops within 190 msec. Specifically, one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4” is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value obtained corresponds to the value obtained. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the reel rotation stops (this is referred to as “scheduled stop position”). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped, and this is referred to as a “stop start position”.

  That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. In other words, the number of symbols that pass through the middle area of the corresponding reel in the corresponding display window in the period from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

  Referring to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is a tentative one, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the planned stop position of the reel.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when there is an appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on a stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), a drawing priority order described later. The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to a table (see FIG. 37 described later). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to in order to determine the search order when the priorities are compared for each of the symbols from the stop start position to the 4th symbol position that is the maximum number of sliding symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referenced is properly used according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of the forward push, the first stop stop table (refer to FIG. 32 described later) at the time of the forward press and the second and third stop stop tables (refer to FIG. 34 described later) at the time of the forward press. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the irregular pressing stop table (see FIG. 35 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pushing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first stop table for forward pressing will be described. The forward stop first stop table shown in FIG. 32 is referred to when the forward push table selection data is “01”. The first stop table at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence relationship between the stop start positions “0” to “20” of the left reel 3L, the number of sliding pieces determination data, and the change status.

  For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the number-of-sliding piece determination data is “0”, and the change status is “1”. The change status is used when referring to a forward pressing control change table (see FIG. 33 described later).

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the forward pressing control change table will be described. The forward pressing control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing.

  For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table (see FIG. 32) at the time of the forward press is “1” and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the change status is “ The stop table number for the second and third stops is “12” at the time of forward pressing. In the forward push control change table, if the change status and the second and third stop stop table numbers for forward push are not registered in the target position, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops and the stop table for irregularity when pushing forward define 1-byte stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  34 is referred to when the second / third stop table for stoppage is “08”. The irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “07”.

  In the stop data specified by the stop tables of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity, is the symbol position associated with the stop data appropriate as the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped? Has information on whether or not. The stop data includes information indicating whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the “A line” column and the “B line” column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. The stop data is defined by assigning information about which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bit corresponding to the “line change” column in each stop table.

  In other words, the second and third stop tables for stoppages and the stop table for anomalies at the time of forward pressing define a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be varied based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to compress information.

  The determination of the number of sliding piece determination data is performed as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, a column of “middle reel A line data” of bit 4 is designated.

  Then, referring to the designated bit string, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not “1” is defined as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position where “1” is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and this difference is used as the number of sliding piece determination data.

  Whether or not the bit string to be referred to is changed from the “A line” column to the “B line” column refers to the “line change” column and “1” is defined in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not. When it is determined that the line is to be changed, the column “B line” is designated thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority table selection table number and stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37 described later).

  When the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, the data in the “left reel first stop” column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the pull-in priority table selection table number is “1”, “00” is acquired as the pull-in priority table number. Even when the middle reel 3C is pressed in the second stop and when the right reel 3R is pressed in the second stop, “00” is maintained as the pull-in priority table number.

  Further, in the pull-in priority table selection table, when the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Get as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the drawing priority table selection table number is “0”, the drawing priority table number is not registered at the target position. Accordingly, in this case, the right column of the first reel first stop column corresponding to the drawing priority table selection table number “0” is referred to, and “00” is acquired as the drawing priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the drawing priority table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers “00” to “04”.

  The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) between the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Each pull-in data is similar to “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. It is represented by byte data, and a unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the one-byte data.

  In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-described first stop table for first stop (see FIG. 32). However, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. In other words, in the present embodiment, a more appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that allow the stop display by the internal winning combination regardless of the number of sliding symbols acquired from the stop table.

  In the present embodiment, the stop display (withdrawal) of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is prioritized over the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. To be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, not only the priority order of the internal winning combination differs depending on the pull-in priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are “01”, “03”, and “04”, the priority number is set to 3, and the pull-in priority table numbers are “00” and “02”. In this case, the number of priority divisions is 1.

  Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is “01” will be described, and description of priorities in other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted. The priority “1” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” includes the abbreviations “C_BAR_A”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, and “C_3_BEL_C1_C____________________________ ”Is defined.

  The priority “2” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” corresponds to the abbreviations “C_BAR_B”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_C”, and “C_B_REP_H” to “C_B_REP_J”. Withdrawal data is specified.

  The priority “3” when the pull-in priority table number is “01” includes the abbreviations “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”, “C_BAR_C” to “C_BAR_E”, “C_B_REP_D” to “C_B_REP_G”, and “C_B_REP_K”. ] To “C_B_REP_P” are defined.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. The search order table preferentially applies from the range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding frames (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding frames is 4) (hereinafter “search”). Order)).

  The search order table defines the sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the stop table and the search order. That is, in this embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. In addition, the search order table is provided assuming that there are a plurality of sliding frames having the same priority, and the search order table is applied in a higher order.

  In this embodiment, as will be described in the priority attraction-in control process of FIG. 93 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and the search order “1” is supported. The number of sliding frames is preferentially applied from the numerical value to be used.

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The game lock lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between various winning numbers acquired by internal lottery during the RT4 gaming state and lottery values of winning game locks. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. Specifically, when the start operation (the tilting operation of the start lever 16 by the player) is detected, the occurrence of the game lock is determined, and when the occurrence of the game lock is determined, the game lock is generated. While the game lock is occurring, even if a closing operation or a stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

  In the game lock lottery process of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is defined in the game lock lottery table. Subtract by lottery value. Then, lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). That is, the player has won the game lock when the subtraction result is less than 0.

  In the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39, when the winning number is from “36” (abbreviation “F_strong angle check”) to “41” (abbreviation “F_reach”), the lottery value of the game lock is It is prescribed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning numbers are “33” to “41”, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform the game lock. For example, when the winning number is “37” (abbreviation “F_middle stage”), the game lock is won (executed) with a probability of 32768/65536.

[Pattern winning action flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the active line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15).

  For example, when the symbol “lip” is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code “00000001” (lip) in the reel type “left”. “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. Data defined in the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is logically AND stored with data stored in a symbol code storage area (described later, see FIG. 45).

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 95 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters and the like used for the various reel effects described above.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area and carryover combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 1 to 25 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 25, when “1” stands for a predetermined bit (when stored), a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the active line. Indicates. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line.

  The main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 25, when “1” stands for a plurality of bits, display of a combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “lost”.

The main RAM 95 is provided with a carryover combination storage area (not shown). The carryover combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area 1 shown in FIG. When “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” are determined as the internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination is stored as a carryover combination in the carryover combination storage area. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, “Lip”-“Lip”-“Bell 2” of “C_MB1”) is displayed on the active line. Retained. While the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming state flag storage area is composed of gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

  In each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, when “1” is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Indicates. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, the MB (“C_MB1” or “C_MB2”) is operated, and the gaming state is the MB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 93 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of stop button pressing order is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol code storage area stores, for each activated line, the symbol code (symbol code storage region 1) of the symbol of the reel that was most recently stopped and the displayable symbols (symbol code storage regions 2 to 26). The After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 40), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Retrieve priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area. That is, in the pull-in priority data storage area, a priority data storage area is provided for each reel type.

  Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “20” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table described above.

  The contents of the priority level pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority level data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority level table number in the pull-in priority level table (see FIG. 37) referred to when determining the pull-in priority level data. . The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-described search order table (see FIG. 38).

<Game state transition flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a transition flow of the gaming state between “RT0 gaming state” and “RT4 gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of game states of “RT0 game state” to “RT4 game state” are provided as RT game states. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and controls the transition between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state”.

  First, at the time of shipment, the gaming state becomes “RT0 gaming state”. Next, in the “RT0 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “Bell spilling eyes” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state shifts to “RT1 gaming state”. In addition, in the “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state”, or “RT4 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols related to “Bell spill” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state is “RT1 gaming state” ”. “Bell spilled eyes” in the present embodiment are display roles of “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order Lip A” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state shifts to “RT1 gaming state”. “Push order lip A” in the present embodiment is a display role of “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_A” shown in FIG.

  In the “RT1 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state shifts to “RT2 gaming state”. Also, in the “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state shifts to “RT2 gaming state”. “Push order lip B” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” illustrated in FIG. 13.

  In the “RT2 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “BB / RB lip” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state shifts to “RT3 gaming state”. “BB / RB Lip” in the present embodiment is a display role of “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z” and “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” shown in FIG.

  In “RT3 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”. In addition, in the “RT1 gaming state” or the “RT2 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”. “Push order lip C” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” shown in FIG.

  In the “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “lower bell” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state is “ Transition to “RT0 gaming state”. The “lower bell” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the first ART is executed when the RT gaming state is “RT3 gaming state”, and the second ART is executed when the RT gaming state is “RT4 gaming state”. The “RT3 gaming state” is shifted to the case where the display combination of “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” is established during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the symbol combination related to “C_BNS_A” is “red 7” − “red 7” − “red 7”. That is, there is a combination of symbols based on a design based on the number “7”, which is usually adopted as a symbol combination related to the operation of the bonus (other than this, it may be a design having better visibility than other symbols). When the stop display is made, the RT gaming state shifts to “RT3 gaming state”, and the first ART is executed. Therefore, the first ART executed during the RT3 gaming state is referred to as a “pseudo bonus”.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the first ART is determined in the “RT1 gaming state”, the stop order for displaying the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” on the active line ( Display auxiliary information) and wait for the combination of symbols related to “push order lip B” to be displayed on the active line. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip B” is displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT2 gaming state”.

  In the “RT2 gaming state”, display auxiliary information for displaying the symbol combination related to “BB / RB lip” on the active line is notified. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “BB / RB Lip” is displayed on the active line, the RT gaming state shifts from “RT2 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state”. As a result, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the “RT1 gaming state”, “RT2 gaming state”, or “RT3 gaming state”, when the execution of the second ART is determined, the symbol related to “push order lip C”. The stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination on the active line is notified. And it waits for the combination of the symbol which concerns on "push order lip C" to be displayed on an active line. Thereafter, when the symbol combination related to “push order lip C” is displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to “RT4 gaming state”. As a result, the second ART is executed.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a correspondence table between internal winning combinations and stop orders, and shows the types of display combinations corresponding to the stop orders.

  “C_CU_REP” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined. “C_CD_REP” indicates a display combination (“C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I”) for which the transition to the RT2 gaming state is determined. In addition, “normal lip” indicates a display combination (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) related to re-playing regardless of the transition of the game state.

  Further, “C_BNS” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. 48, when “C_BNS * 1” described in FIG. 48 is subjected to stop control using the stop table, “C_BNS_A” is most easily displayed, and “C_BNS_O” to “C_BNS_T” are not displayed. In addition, “C_BNS * 2” is most easily displayed when stop control using the stop table is performed, and “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_N” and “C_BNS_U” to “C_BNS_Z” are not displayed.

“C_SBB” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. “C_Small V” is a display combination (“C_Small V_REP_A” determined to be transferred to the RT4 gaming state (second ART).
”To“ C_small V_REP_C ”).

  “C_3_BEL” described in FIG. 48 indicates display combinations not related to the game state transition (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”). When “C_3_BEL” is established, three medals are paid out. Similar to “C_3_BEL”, “C_9_BEL” indicates display combinations (“C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) that are not related to the transition of the gaming state. When “C_9_BEL” is established, nine medals are paid out.

  “C_ONE” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) for which transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “C_HAZ” indicates a display combination (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined.

  Also, “C_13_BEL” described in FIG. 48 indicates display combinations (“C_13_BEL_A” to “C_13_BEL_AP”) that are not related to the game state transition, and “C_14_BEL” is a display combination that is not related to the game state transition (“ C_14_BEL_A ”to“ C_14_BEL_K ”). When “C_13_BEL” is established, 13 medals are paid out, and when “C_14_BEL” is established, 14 medals are paid out.

  During the MB gaming state, either “C_13_BEL” or “C_14_BEL” can be established, and the MB gaming state ends when more than 13 medals are paid out. For example, when “C_14_BEL” is established in the first game in the MB gaming state, the MB gaming state is terminated in that game. As a result, the player obtains 11 medals (14 (paid-out number) -3 (inserted number) = 11 (acquired number)).

  On the other hand, when “C_13_BEL” is established in the first game and “C_14_BEL” is established in the second game in the MB gaming state, the player has 21 cards (27 (payout number) −6 (inserted number) = 21 ( The number of medals))) can be obtained. In the MB gaming state, the winning number “1” (rotation stop number “43”), “4” (rotation stop number “46”), “19” (rotation stop number “61”) , “21” (rotation stop number “63”) is determined, “C — 14_BEL” is established in the first game.

  In the present embodiment, a stop display of various symbol combinations related to replay such as “C_CU_REP” and “C_CD_REP”, and a combination of various symbols related to “Bell” such as “C_ONE”, “C_3_BEL”, and “C_9_BEL” The push order is set for each success or failure of the stop display.

  For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “12”, as the internal winning combination, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B” and “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are duplicated. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “12”, “12” is determined as the rotation stop number.

  In this case, on the condition that the stop order by the pressing operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “left middle right” or “right and left middle”, either “C_CU_REP” (“C_CU_REP_A” or “C_CU_REP_B”). ) Is stopped and displayed. Further, the combination of symbols related to “C_CD_REP” (any one of “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” or “middle right and left”. In addition, the combination of symbols related to “normal lip” (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) is stopped and displayed on the condition that the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left”. Is done.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “14”, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_J”, “C_BNS_O” to “C_BNS_T”, “C_BNS_Y”, “C_C_REP” , “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_F” are won. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “12”, “14” is determined as the rotation stop number.

  In this case, “normal lip” (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” is provided on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “middle left / right” or “middle right / left”. The combination of symbols related to "any of the above" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the combination of symbols related to any of “C_BNS * 1” (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_J”, “C_BNS_Y”) is stopped on the condition that the stop order is “middle left / right” and “middle left / right”. Is displayed. Further, if the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (correct answer), any of “C_BNS * 2” (“C_BNS_O” to “C_BNS_T”) The combination of symbols related to ()) is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the stop operation is not a predetermined timing (correct answer), the symbol combinations related to “C_Oyama REP_A” to “C_Oyama REP_F” are stopped and displayed.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “25”, “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B” ”,“ C_3_BEL_C1 ”to“ C_3_BEL_C4 ”,“ C_ONE_A ”to“ C_ONE_E ”. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “25”, “25” is determined as the rotation stop number.

  In this case, "C_3_BEL" ("C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is "left middle right" or "right and left middle". ”To“ C_3_BEL_B8 ”and“ C_3_BEL_C1 ”to“ C_3_BEL_C4 ”) are stopped and displayed. In addition, the combination of symbols related to “C_9_BEL” (any one of “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” and “middle right and left”. Further, the combination of symbols related to “C_ONE” (any one of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “28”, “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_CHN_A”, “C_ONE_A” "-" C_ONE_E "wins. In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “28”, “28” is determined as the rotation stop number.

  In this case, the stop order by the pressing operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, and the stop button pressing timing with respect to the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer). For example, the combination of symbols related to “C_3_BEL” (any one of “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”) is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, if the stop order is “middle left” or “middle left and right” and the pressing timing of the stop button for the rotating reel is other than a predetermined timing (incorrect answer), “C_HAZ” (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” The combination of symbols related to "any of the above" is stopped and displayed. As a result, medals are not paid out.

  Therefore, when the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing (correct answer), three medals are paid out. If the stop button is pressed at a timing other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

  In addition, the combination of symbols related to “C_9_BEL” (any one of “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right” and “middle right and left”. As a result, nine medals are paid out. Further, the combination of symbols related to “C_ONE” (any one of “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”. As a result, one medal is paid out.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described. FIG. 49 is a correspondence table of the internal winning combination, stop order, and RT transition, and shows the transition destination of the RT gaming state according to the stop order.

  In the non-MB game state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “12”, the symbol related to “normal lip” is provided on the condition that the stop order is “right left middle” or “right middle left”. The combination of is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  For example, in the RT4 gaming state (second ART), if the end of the “RT4 gaming state” is not determined, the stop order should be “right middle left” or “right middle left” (display auxiliary information) ). As a result, the symbol combination related to “normal lip” is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained. In other words, it is notified that the stop order should be “middle right / left” or “middle right / left” so as not to shift from the RT4 gaming state (second ART) to another RT gaming state.

  In the non-MB game state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “14”, “C_BNS (* 1)” is provided on the condition that the stop order is “left middle right” or “left middle right”. The combination of symbols related to is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  For example, when the transition to the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “BB flag” or “BB preparing flag” described later is on, the stop order is set to “left middle right” or It informs that it should be "middle left and right" and that it should aim to stop display of the combination of symbols of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). Thereby, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS (* 1)” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 1)” (the symbol combination reminiscent of BB), the stop order should be “left middle right” or “right and left middle”, and “ It notifies that it is better to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of “Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7”.

  On the other hand, when the transition to the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “RB flag” or “RB preparation flag” described later is on, the stop order is set to “middle right” or “ It informs that it should be "right middle left" and that it should aim to stop display of the combination of symbols of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). Thereby, the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 2)” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 2)” (the symbol combination reminiscent of RB), the stop order should be “right left middle” or “right middle left” and “ It notifies that it is better to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of “Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7”.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small role / replay data pointer is “18”, the symbol related to “C_SBB” is provided on the condition that the stop order is “left middle right” or “left middle right”. The combination is stopped. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  For example, when the transition to the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and a “SBB flag” or “SBB preparing flag” described later is on, the stop order is set to “left middle right” or (Display auxiliary information) is notified that it should be "middle left and right" and that it is desirable to stop display of the combination of symbols of "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7". Thereby, the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” (the symbol combination reminiscent of SBB), it is preferable to set the stop order to “left middle right” or “left and right middle”, and “white 7” − It is informed that it is better to aim at the stop display of the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”.

  On the other hand, when the transition to the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the “SBB flag” or “SBB preparing flag” is OFF, the stop order is “middle left / right” or “middle right / left”. "(Display auxiliary information) is notified. As a result, the combination of symbols related to “normal lip” is stopped and displayed, and the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed. That is, it notifies that the stop order should be “middle left / right” or “middle right / left” in order not to stop and display the combination of symbols related to “C_SBB” (the combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB).

<Description of sub game state>
Here, the sub gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, various game states related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) are referred to as “sub game states”. In the present embodiment, the general state, CZ (chance zone), first ART (pseudo bonus), second ART, BR (battle rush) are set as the sub gaming state.

[General status]
The general state is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state. During this general state, basically, a CZ (chance zone) lottery table described later (see FIG. 50 described later) is referred to for each game to determine whether or not the sub gaming state is to be shifted (entered) to CZ. A lottery (CZ lottery) is performed. When the transition to CZ is determined, lottery for determining the number of precursor games (hereinafter referred to as “the number of CZ precursor games”) until the transition to CZ is performed.

  In the pachislot machine according to the present invention, a CZ lottery table may be used in which lottery of whether or not to shift to CZ is performed, and lottery of the number of CZ precursor games is also performed. That is, whether or not to shift to CZ and the number of CZ precursor games when shifting to CZ may be determined by one lottery.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub gaming state executed during the RT0 gaming state and during the RT1 gaming state. When the transition to the CZ is determined in the general state and the game of the number of CZ precursor games is consumed, the sub game state shifts from the general state to the CZ. Then, after the sub gaming state shifts to CZ, a notification that the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) should be stopped (hereinafter referred to as “navigating to the black BAR”) is displayed. ”) Is performed a prescribed number of times, the CZ ends.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ, execution of the first ART is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the first ART is determined when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) is consumed before the “navigating for black BAR” is performed a prescribed number of times.

  In the present embodiment, two types of CZs “CZ1” and “CZ2” are provided as CZs. In “CZ1”, “4” is set as the prescribed number of times of “navigating to aim at the black BAR”. That is, “CZ1” ends when “navigating to the black BAR” is performed four times. On the other hand, in “CZ2”, “10” is set as the specified number of times of “navigating to the black BAR”. That is, “CZ2” ends when “navigating to the black BAR” is performed ten times. Note that the number of times of “navigating to the black BAR” in “CZ1” and “CZ2” is managed by the CZ cut-in number counter.

  In “CZ1” and “CZ2”, when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is determined as an internal winning combination, the probability of executing “navigating to the black BAR” is the same. The probability of executing “aiming for black BAR and navigating” when the specific internal winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination is also the same. Therefore, “CZ2”, which has a larger number of prescribed “navigating for black BAR”, is more likely to be determined to execute the first ART than “CZ1”.

  Note that “CZ2” may have a higher probability of winning a pseudo bonus in bonus lottery than “CZ1”. In addition, in “CZ2” according to the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, the probability that a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is won is higher than “CZ1”.

[First ART]
The first ART is a sub gaming state executed during the RT3 gaming state, and is a so-called pseudo bonus. For example, the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined when the pseudo bonus is won by the bonus lottery during the general state, during the CZ, during the first ART, and during the second ART. The execution of the first ART (pseudo bonus) is also determined when a combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped during CZ.

  Furthermore, the winning of the first ART is also determined when the bonus winning game number determined in advance by lottery is exhausted after the end of the first ART. The number of bonus winning games determined in advance by lottery is set in the bonus winning game number counter. The value of the bonus winning game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game (game) performed after the end of the first ART. When the bonus winning game number counter becomes “0”, the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined.

  When the second ART is started after the end of the first ART, the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted from the game in the second ART. If a bonus bonus is won by a bonus lottery before the value of the bonus winning game number counter becomes “0”, or if a winning of a pseudo bonus is determined during CZ, a new bonus winning game number is obtained. Determined by lottery.

  As the first ART (pseudo bonus), three types of pseudo bonuses of RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus), and SBB (super big bonus) are provided. In the present embodiment, when the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined, one of RB, BB, and SBB is determined by lottery.

  RB, BB, and SBB differ from each other in the number of stay games (hereinafter, “first ART start G (game) number”). In the present embodiment, the first ART start G number when the type of pseudo bonus is RB is determined to be “30”. Further, the first ART start G number in the case of BB is determined to be “60”, and the first ART start G number in the case of SBB is determined to be “100”.

  The “first ART start G number” determined according to the type of the pseudo bonus is set in the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter. The value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game in the first ART (pseudo bonus). The first ART (pseudo bonus) ends when the value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter becomes “0”.

  The first ART is started after the game of the number of the first ART precursor games determined by lottery is digested and the game in preparation is completed. In the first ART precursor game, an effect is provided to notify whether or not the first ART (pseudo bonus) has been won. If the player wins the first ART and the type is BB or SBB, the game during the BB preparation is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game. On the other hand, when the type of the first ART is RB, the game in the RB preparation is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game.

  In the game in preparation for BB when the type of the determined pseudo bonus is BB, the combination stop display of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state ("C_CD_REP") or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state ("normal lip") The stop order for making it happen is notified. Further, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “14” to “17”, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS (* 1)” described above (the combination of symbols reminiscent of BB). The stop order for the stop display is notified. When the symbol combination related to “C_BNS (* 1)” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose type of pseudo bonus is BB is started.

  In the game in preparation for BB when the type of the determined pseudo bonus is SBB, the combination stop display of the symbol relating to the transition to the RT2 gaming state ("C_CD_REP") or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state ("normal lip") The stop order for making it happen is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “18”, the stop order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to “C_SBB” (the combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB) is displayed. Informed. When the symbol combination related to “C_SBB” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose type of pseudo bonus is SBB is started.

  In the game in preparation for RB, the stop order for displaying the combination stop of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normal lip”) is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “14” to “17”, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS * 2” described above (the combination of symbols reminiscent of RB) is stopped and displayed. The stop order for making it happen is notified. When the symbol combination related to “C_BNS * 2” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is RB is started.

[Second ART]
The second ART is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT4 gaming state. For example, the winning of the second ART is during the first ART (pseudo bonus) game in which the type of the pseudo bonus won in the sub gaming state other than during the second ART is BB (hereinafter, “ It is determined when the ART is won by the ART lottery. When winning of the second ART is determined, “50” is determined as the number of staying games of the second ART (hereinafter, “second ART start G (game) number”).

  “50” which is the “second ART start G number” is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game in the second ART. The second ART ends when the value of the ART game number counter becomes “0”.

  The second ART is started after a game of the number of the second ART precursor games determined by lottery is digested and an ART preparation game is passed. In the second ART precursor game, an effect is provided to notify whether or not the second ART has been won. When the second ART is won, the ART preparatory game is played after the second ART precursor game is completed.

  In the ART preparing game, the stop order for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to “C_small V” described above is notified. When the symbol combination related to “C_small V” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state, and the second ART is started.

  In the second ART, for each game, a number-of-games extra lottery table (not shown) is referred to, and the number of extra games is lottery (an extra game number lottery), and the determined number of extra games is added to the ART game number counter. That is, as the number of additional games is determined in the second ART, the number of ART games increases, and the second ART advantageous to the player can be continued for a long time.

[BR (Battle Rush)]
BR (Battle Rush) is a sub gaming state related to an effect in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is expected, and is executed during the second ART. This lottery for determining whether or not to execute BR is performed during the first ART (pseudo bonus) game in which the type of the pseudo bonus that was won during the second ART is BB (hereinafter referred to as “ART in progress”). BB ”) for each game. Further, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted during the period of executing BR.

  In BR, BR continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games (“10” in the present embodiment), and when BR continuation is determined, an extra G (game) number lottery for lottering the addition (addition) number of ART games is determined. Do. The number of extra games determined by the extra G number lottery is notified in the last game (tenth game) of the predetermined number of games. The determined number of added games is added to the ART game number counter.

  Further, when the number of times BR continuation is determined (BR continuation number) is a specific number (in this embodiment, n times “5” (n = 1, 2, 3...)), The additional G number. A separate lottery G (game) number lottery is performed separately from the lottery.

  As the additional extra G number lottery of the present embodiment, five types of lottery of “additional extra A”, “additional extra B”, “additional extra C1”, “additional extra C2” and “additional extra C3” are provided. When the additional extra G number lottery is performed, the type of additional extra G number lottery is determined by the additional extra lottery during BR, and the number of additional games is determined by the determined additional extra G number lottery.

  The determination and notification of the number of additional games by the additional additional G number lottery is performed by a game of a special number of games (in this embodiment, “2”) that is performed after a predetermined number of games have been completed. Further, the additional game number determined by the additional additional G number lottery is added to the additional game number counter. When a game with a special number of games is completed, a game with a predetermined number of games is started. If BR continuation is determined, the determined number of additional games is notified in the last game with the predetermined number of games. The

  In this way, in BR, when the number of ART games to be added (added) is determined, there is an opportunity to add the next number of ART games after a predetermined number of games. Thereby, the interest regarding the determination of the addition of the number of ART games can be continued, and the interest of the game can be improved for a long time.

  In addition, in a game with a predetermined number of games in BR, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the addition of the number of ART games to continue. As a result, the player's expectation of obtaining an advantageous privilege (addition of the number of ART games) is maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, since the continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games, the result of the continuous lottery can be suggested in the game of the predetermined number of games. That is, the result of the continuous lottery can be suggested using a continuous performance performed over a plurality of games. Thereby, even if the game in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is not determined continues, the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the number of times that continuation is determined exceeds a specified number (“20” in this embodiment), the first ART (pseudo bonus) win and BR ( The start of (battle rush) is determined. Thereby, the feeling of expectation for privilege provision other than provision of the number of added games can be included in the result of the continuous lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times that continuation is determined is a specific number (in this embodiment, n times “5” (n = 1, 2, 3,...)), An extra G number lottery is added. Another additional extra G number lottery is performed. As a result, if the continuation continues, the value of the added game number may increase, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Configuration of data table stored on ROM cartridge substrate>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 will be described.

[CZ (chance zone) lottery table]
First, a CZ (chance zone) lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is the general state. This CZ lottery table shows the correspondence between the winning content of CZ (chance zone) and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the CZ lottery using the CZ lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is determined in the CZ lottery table. Subtract sequentially by value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 50, when CZ lottery is performed with reference to the CZ lottery table, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be “no win”. For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “No winning” is obtained with a probability of 32718/32768, and “CZ2 winning is” with a probability of 50/32768.

[CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table]
Next, the CZ cut-in addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ cut-in addition lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is CZ. This CZ cut-in addition lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence / absence of the specified number of additions and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the cut-in addition lottery using the CZ cut-in addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) Subtract sequentially with lottery values specified in the cut-in addition lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “add 1 to the specified number of times” is always determined, and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_watermelon”). In some cases, “add 1 to the specified number” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. When “1 addition to the specified number of times” is determined, “1” is added to the value of the cut-in number counter in CZ. This increases the number of times “navigating to the black BAR” in the CZ by one.

[CZ cut-in lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table will be described. The CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is CZ. This CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table indicates the correspondence between the presence or absence of loss cut-in when the internal lottery result is “lost” and the lottery value set for them.

  In the cut-in occurrence lottery using the CZ mid-cut generation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) Subtract sequentially with lottery values specified in the cut-in occurrence lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is “lost”, “loss cut-in occurrence” is determined with a probability of 10,000 / 32768. The “miss cut-in” is “navigating to a black BAR” performed when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not won. In “Navigating for Black BAR”, the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) should be stopped and the stop order in that case (right middle left) Inform. When the lose cut-in is executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not stopped and displayed. In addition, even when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is won, “navigation for black BAR” is performed.

[Bonus lottery table]
Next, the bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus lottery table is referred to when the sub game state is the general state or the second ART. This bonus lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence / absence of a pseudo bonus and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the bonus lottery using the bonus lottery table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is determined in the bonus lottery table. Subtract sequentially by value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), 16384/3
When the bonus winning is determined with a probability of 2768 and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_Watermelon”), the “bonus winning” is determined with a probability of 326/32768. When the “bonus winning” is determined, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is started through the first ART precursor game and the game under preparation corresponding to various pseudo bonuses.

  The bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 53 is a low probability bonus lottery table in which the probability of determining “bonus winning” is a predetermined probability. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a high-probability bonus lottery table having a higher probability of determining “bonus winning” than the low-probability bonus lottery table is also provided. In the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table to be used is determined according to the types of a plurality of modes to be described later.

[G lottery table on G number in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the G number addition lottery table in BB will be described. The lottery table with the G number in BB is referred to when the sub gaming state is BB in the first ART. This G number extra lottery table in BB shows the correspondence between the contents of the extra and lottery values set according to the winning number.

  In the G number addition lottery using the G number addition lottery table in the BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) G number in BB is added, and the lottery values specified in the lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), “20G” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is “34” (abbreviation “F_watermelon”). In this case, “10G” is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. When the number of G (game) such as “10G” and “20G” is determined, the determined number of G is added to the BB medium / high probability counter.

[ART lottery table in BB]
Next, the BB ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The BB ART lottery table shown in FIG. 55 is referred to when the sub gaming state is a non-ART BB and is in a high probability state described later. This BB ART lottery table shows the second in the case where the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”). The correspondence between the presence / absence of ART winning and the lottery values set for them is shown.

  In the ART lottery using the BB ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is stored in the BB ART lottery table. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 55, if the sub gaming state is a non-ART BB and a high probability state and the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, the “ART winning” is always set. It is determined. This “ART winning” means that the winning of the second ART is determined. When “ART winning” is determined, the second ART is started through the second ART precursor game and the ART preparing game.

[BR lottery table in BB]
Next, the BR lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. The BR lottery table during BB is referred to when the sub gaming state is BB during ART and is in a high probability state. The BR lottery table in BB shows the BR winning when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”). And the correspondence between lottery values set for them.

  In the BR lottery using the BR lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is stored in the BR lottery table in BB. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the sub gaming state is BB in ART and is in a high probability state, and the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, the probability of 16384/32768 is “ “Battle Rush 1 (BR1) Winning” is determined, and “Battle Rush 2 (BR2) Winning” is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. “BR2” has a higher probability of winning “BR continuation” in continuous lottery than “BR1”. The determined “BR1” or “BR2” is started after the end of the first ART (pseudo bonus).

[BR continuous lottery table]
Next, the BR continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. The BR1 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to when the sub gaming state is BR1. Also, the BR2 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to when the sub gaming state is BR2. The BR1 continuous lottery table and the BR2 continuous lottery table indicate the correspondence between the presence / absence of BR continuation and the lottery values set for them.

  In the BR lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) The lottery values specified in the lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table, “BR continuation” is determined with a probability of 26214/32768. As shown in FIG. 58, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, “BR continuation” is determined with a probability of 29490/32768.

[Additional lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the BR additional addition lottery table will be described. The additional extra lottery table during BR is referred to when the sub game state is BR. This additional extra lottery table during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the extra and lottery values set according to the number of BRs to be continued.

  In the additional extra lottery using the additional extra lottery table during BR, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is added extra during BR. Subtract sequentially with lottery values specified in the lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, if the BR continuation number is “5” (BR5th station), “additional addition A” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and “additional addition B” is determined with a probability of 9434/32768. The Further, in this case, “additional addition C1” is determined with a probability of 4000/32768, “additional addition C2” is determined with a probability of 2500/32768, and “additional addition C3” is determined with a probability of 450/32768. Is done.

[Additional extra during BR and promotion lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, an additional addition during BR and a promotion lottery table will be described. The additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR is referred to when the sub game state is BR. This additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the additional addition and promotion lottery using the BR additional addition and promotion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment), Additional addition during BR and subtraction sequentially with lottery values defined in the promotion lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), 25768/3
“Additional addition C1” is determined with a probability of 2768, and “Additional addition C2” is determined with a probability of 6000/32768. In this case, “additional addition C3” is determined with a probability of 1000/32768. If it has already been determined to perform additional extra lottery, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the additional extra lottery is promoted using the additional extra and promoted lottery table during BR.

  It should be noted that the upper additional lottery has a higher expectation (probability) that the value of the number of added games to be determined is larger than the additional additional lottery that is lower than that. In this embodiment, “additional addition B” is higher than “additional addition B”, and “additional addition C1”, “additional addition C2”, and “additional addition C3” are higher than “additional addition B”. . Further, “additional addition C2” is higher than “additional addition C2”, and “additional addition C3” is higher than “additional addition C2”.

[Additional addition A addition G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition A addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional addition A addition G number lottery table is referred to when the addition G number lottery related to “addition addition A” is performed in BR. This additional extra A extra G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the extra G number and the lottery value set according to the extra G number.

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra A extra G number lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is added. Addition A Addition G number is sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined in the lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the extra G number lottery using the additional extra A extra G number lottery table, “10” is determined as the “additional game number” with the probability of 12568/32768, and “additional game number” with the probability of 13000/32768. “20” is determined. Further, “100” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 500/32768, and “200” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the determined value of “number of added games” is added to the ART game number counter.

[Additional extra B extra G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition B addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional addition B addition G number lottery table is referred to when the addition G number lottery related to “addition addition B” is performed in BR. This additional extra B extra G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the extra G number and the lottery value set according to the stop operation.

  The additional G number lottery using the additional extra B extra G number lottery table is performed each time a stop operation is detected. The column “1 on” in FIG. 62 is referred to when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed. The column “2on_previous + 10” is referred to when the second stop operation (second stop operation) is performed after “10” is determined as the number of additional games in the first stop operation. The The column “3on_previous + 10” is referred to when the third stop operation (the third stop operation) is performed after “10” is determined as the number of additional games in the second stop operation. The

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra B extra G number lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is added. Addition B Addition G The number of lottery values specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the case of “1 on”, “20” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 13000/32768. When the second stop operation is performed after “20” is determined as the “number of added games” in the first stop operation, “2on_previous + 20” in the additional G number lottery
"Is referred to.

  For example, in the case of “2on_before + 20”, “30” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 6000/32768. When the third stop operation is performed after “30” is determined as the “number of added games” in the second stop operation, the column “3on_previous + 30” is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

  For example, in the case of “3on_previous + 30”, “50” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 500/32768. In this case, by performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, “100” is acquired as the “number of added games” in total, and “100” is displayed in the ART game number counter. Is added.

  Referring to the column “2on_previous + 20” in FIG. 62, “0” and “10” are not determined as the number of additional games. Also, referring to the column “2on_previous + 30” in FIG. 62, “0”, “10”, and “20” are not determined as the number of additional games. Then, referring to the column “3on_previous + 50”, “0”, “10”, “20”, and “30” are not determined as the number of additional games.

  As described above, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table, the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation is greater than or equal to the number of additional games determined by the first stop operation. The number of additional games determined by the stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation.

[Additional addition C addition G number lottery table]
Next, the additional addition C addition G number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The additional extra C extra G number lottery table is referred to when the extra G number lottery related to “addition extra C1”, “addition extra C2” or “addition extra C3” is performed in BR. This additional extra C extra G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the extra G number and the lottery values set according to the types of additional extra C (C1 to C3).

  The extra G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table is performed each time the player presses the MAX bet button 14 and detects that “0” is determined as the “additional game number”. ("No continuation")

  In the extra G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are added. Addition C Addition G The number of lottery values specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when the type of the additional addition C is “additional additional C1”, “0” is determined as the “number of additional games” with a probability of 8918/32768. Further, when the type of the additional extra C is “additional extra C2”, “0” is determined as the “number of extra games” with a probability of 4918/32768. Then, when the type of the additional addition C is “additional addition C3”, “0” is determined as the “number of additional games” with a probability of 2918/32768.

  In other words, “additional extra C2” has a higher probability of continuing the additional G number lottery than “additional additional C1”, and “additional additional C3” has a higher probability of continuing the additional G number lottery than “additional additional C2”. high.

  In addition, when the additional G number lottery using the additional G addition lottery table is started, when the start lever 16 is operated and the next game is started, the additional extra C addition G number is automatically added. An extra G number lottery using a lottery table is performed. Then, when “0” is determined as the “number of added games” in the automatically added G number lottery performed automatically, the automatic additional G number lottery ends. In addition, the automatic addition G number lottery may be provided with an upper limit value (for example, “1000”) of the value of the “number of addition games” to be determined.

  Further, in the additional G number lottery using the additional extra C extra G number lottery table, the start lever 16 is operated in a state where “other than“ 0 ”is determined as“ additional game number ”and“ continue ”is determined. There is a case. In this case, the “addition number of games” determined so far is validated, and the additional G number lottery using the additional addition C addition G number lottery table is automatically performed. Then, the “addition game number” determined in the automatically added G number lottery is added to the “addition game number” that has been determined before the automatic addition G number lottery is performed. “Additional number of games” obtained by the extra G number lottery using the C extra G number lottery table.

[Causal value lottery table]
Next, the causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The causal value lottery table is referred to when performing causal value lottery satisfying various conditions. This causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to various conditions.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a value of “causal value” is obtained in various scenes where the interest of the game is reduced (the player feels uncomfortable). Then, a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the accumulated “causal value”. Therefore, even if a scene in which the interest of the game is reduced occurs, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained thereafter. Thereby, it can prevent that a player stops a game with the fall of the interest of a game.

  In the causal value lottery using the causal value lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are defined in the causal value lottery table. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 64 shows a causal value lottery table (part 1). This causal value lottery table (part 1) shows a correspondence relationship between causal values and lottery values set in accordance with the number of games (G) between rare roles.

  The rare role according to the present embodiment includes “strong bell” (winning number “27”), “watermelon” (winning number “34”), “weak cherry” (winning number “35”), “strong cherry” (winning number) Number "36") and "chance eyes" (winning numbers "38" to "40"). The “G number between rare combinations” is the number of games from when any rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination until when any rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination.

  For example, when “the number of G between rare roles” reaches “50 G (game)”, “1” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. If the “G number between rare roles” exceeds “200 G”, the “200 G” column is referred to whenever the “G number between rare roles” increases by 100 games (G) thereafter. Perform value lottery.

  FIG. 65 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 2). This causal value lottery table (part 2) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of games (G) between bonuses. The “G number between bonuses” is the number of games from the end of the first ART (pseudo bonus) to the start of the next first ART (pseudo bonus).

  For example, when the “G number between bonuses” reaches “200 G (game)”, “1” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 66 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 3). This causal value lottery table (part 3) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of games (G) between BBs. The “G number between BBs” is the number of games from the end of the BB in the first ART (pseudo bonus) to the start of the BB in the next first ART (pseudo bonus).

  For example, when “the number of G between BBs” reaches “400 G (game)”, “3” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 67 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 4). This causal value lottery table (part 4) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of games (G) between ARTs. The “G number between ARTs” is the number of games from the end of the second ART to the start of the next second ART.

  For example, when “G number between ARTs” reaches “500 G (game)”, “3” is determined as “causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 68 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 5). This causal value lottery table (No. 5) shows a correspondence relationship between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of consecutive RBs (the number of consecutive RBs). The “number of consecutive RBs (number of consecutive RBs)” is the number of times that RBs are continuously lottered as the type of pseudo bonus when the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined. The number of consecutive RBs is counted by an RB continuous counter.

  For example, when “the number of consecutive RBs” is “4”, “5” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 1000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. The value of the RB continuous counter is cleared when BB or SBB is determined in the first ART (pseudo bonus).

  FIG. 69 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 6). This causal value lottery table (No. 6) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of consecutive CZ (chance zone) failures. The “number of consecutive CZ failures” is the number of times that “CZ1” and “CZ2” are finished without the first ART (pseudo bonus) being determined. In the present embodiment, the causal value lottery table (No. 6) is also provided with a field for the first CZ failure. Further, the number of consecutive CZ failures is counted by a CZ failure continuous counter.

  For example, when “the number of consecutive CZ failures” is “failure — 2 consecutive”, “1” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the CZ failure continuous counter is cleared when the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined in “CZ1” and “CZ2”. Note that the value of the CZ failure continuous counter may be cleared when the first ART (pseudo bonus) is started.

  FIG. 70 shows a causal value lottery table (part 7). This causal value lottery table (No. 7) shows the correspondence between the causal values and the lottery values set in accordance with the number of continuous games of the CZ completed without the bonus confirmation.

  For example, if “the number of continuation G of CZ completed without determining bonus” is “4G (game)”, “10” is determined as “causal value” with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  “CZ1” and “CZ2” are periods in which the player's interest is enhanced because they can expect the determination of the first ART (pseudo bonus) rather than the general game. However, since “CZ1” and “CZ2” according to this embodiment are the number of executions of “aiming for black BAR navigation”, there is a possibility that it will end in a short period (small number of games). Therefore, when “CZ1” and “CZ2” end in a short period of time, the probability of assigning “causal value” or “causal value” is increased. As a result, even if there is a scene where the interest of the game in “CZ1” and “CZ2” is reduced, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained thereafter, and the player can be prevented from stopping the game. it can.

  FIG. 71 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 8). The causal value lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the setting of the pachislot 1 is changed. This causal value lottery table (No. 8) shows the correspondence between causal values and lottery values set according to the causal values.

  For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is changed, “10” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768, and “40” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 8000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 72 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 9). This causal value lottery table (No. 9) shows a correspondence relationship between causal values and lottery values set according to the number of games digested during preparation of various pseudo bonuses and ART (second ART). In addition, the number of games digested during preparation is counted by a preparation digestion G number counter.

  For example, when “the number of games digested during preparation” reaches “20G (game)”, “1” is determined as “causal value” with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. In addition, the value of the G digest counter in preparation is cleared on condition that various pseudo bonuses or the start of the second ART is started.

[Provisional causal value lottery table]
Next, the provisional causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The provisional causal value lottery table is referred to when the development effect fails. This provisional causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between provisional causal values and lottery values set according to the type of development effect.

  The “development effect” according to the present embodiment is executed continuously over a plurality of games and whether or not the first ART (pseudo bonus) is won or whether or not the CZ (chance zone) is won. It is an effect that informs. The “when the development effect has failed” is a case where it is notified that the first ART (pseudo bonus) has not been won or the CZ (chance zone) has not been won in the development effect.

  The notice that the first ART (pseudo bonus) was won and the CZ (chance zone) was won in the development effect was made according to the game machine according to the present invention “the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player was decided. This is a specific example of “notification of that”. Then, in the development effect, the notification that the first ART (pseudo bonus) has not been won and that the CZ (chance zone) has not been won is notified by the “game state advantageous to the player” according to the gaming machine of the present invention. This is a specific example of “notification that the start has not been determined”.

  The “notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined” may be various winning notifications such as the fact that the second ART (ART) has won. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine having a bonus (so-called “BB” or “MB” serving as a carryover, etc.), the bonus is given as “notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined”. You can mention that you have won.

  In addition, the time when the “gaming state advantageous to the player” is started may be from the next game after the notification is made, and a special condition is satisfied in the game after the notification is made. It may be the case. As special conditions, for example, a special internal winning combination (an internal winning combination related to a bonus) is determined, or a special symbol combination (a combination of symbols related to the start of a bonus) is stopped and displayed. Can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, the “notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined” according to the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the definite notification of the various types of winnings as described above, but is described above. Such notifications may indicate various types of winnings. In addition, the “notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has not been determined” according to the gaming machine of the present invention is to be surely notified that various winnings as described above have not been determined. It is not limited to, It may be information that suggests that various winnings have not been determined.

  In the temporary causal value lottery using the temporary causal value lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as a temporary causal value lottery. Subtract sequentially with lottery values specified in the table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when “Development effect 1” fails, “3” is determined as the “provisional causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768. On the other hand, when “Development effect 4” fails, “3” is determined as the “provisional causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. A “causal value” is determined based on the “provisional causal value” and an “internal point” described later.

  “Development effect 1” indicates a specific example of the first effect related to the gaming machine of the present invention, and “Development effect 4” indicates a specific example of the second effect related to the gaming machine of the present invention. “Development effect 4” has a higher probability of being notified that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player than “development effect 1” has been determined. Therefore, in the “development effect 4”, when it is notified that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has not been determined, the player's dissatisfaction increases, but a privilege advantageous later is granted. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will be done.

[Internal point lottery table]
Next, an internal point lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal point lottery table is referred to when an internal point lottery is performed. And an internal point lottery is performed at every game. This internal point lottery table shows the correspondence between internal points and lottery values set according to the winning number (internal winning combination).

  In the internal point lottery using the internal point lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined in the internal point lottery table. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviation “F_strong bell”), 512/327
“1” is determined as an “internal point” with a probability of 68, and “3” is determined as an “internal point” with a probability of 265/32768. The determined “internal point” is added to the internal point counter.

  The value of the internal point counter is the highest “causal value” determined when the development effect fails. For example, it is assumed that “5” is determined as the “temporary causal value” by the temporary causal value lottery performed when the development effect fails, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is “10”. In this case, since “10” is guaranteed as the maximum value of the “causal value”, “5” of the “provisional causal value” is determined as the “causal value”.

  On the other hand, it is assumed that “5” is determined as the “temporary causal value” by the temporary causal value lottery, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is “3”. In this case, since “3” is guaranteed as the maximum value of the “causal value”, “5” of the “provisional causal value” is not determined as the “causal value” as it is, and the internal value acquired so far “3”, which is the same value as the point, is determined as the “causal value”. If the development effect fails and the “causal value” is determined, the value determined as the “causal value” is subtracted from the value of the internal point counter.

[Causal stock consumption lottery table]
Next, the causal value stock consumption lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The causal value stock consumption lottery table is referred to when a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the value of the causal value stock. This causal value stock consumption lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of consumption of causal value stock and the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of consumption of causal value stock.

  The “causal value stock” is given when the “causal value” becomes “100” or more. Specifically, when the value of the causal value counter becomes “100” or more, “1” is added to the causal value stock counter, and “100” is subtracted from the value of the causal value counter.

  In the causal value stock consumption lottery using the causal value stock consumption lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as a causal value. Subtract sequentially with lottery values stipulated in the stock consumption lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the value of the causal value stock, “no consumption” of the “causal value stock” is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. In this case, a privilege advantageous to the player is given without reducing the value of the causal value stock counter.

  As a privilege advantageous to the player to be granted based on the value of the causal value stock, changing the type of the pseudo bonus to a higher pseudo bonus can be mentioned. For example, when “BB” is determined as the pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is changed to “SBB”. In addition, when the transition to CZ1 is determined, the transition to CZ2 may be changed. In the present embodiment, a specific example of privilege granting means in which the sub CPU 102 grants a privilege advantageous to the player is shown.

  Benefits that are advantageous to the player are not granted immediately when the “Causal Value Stock” is 1 or more, but when a specific condition (determination of pseudo bonus) is met, or at a specific timing (pseudo It is preferable that the bonus be given). In this case, after the “causal value stock” becomes 1 or more, the game can be prompted to continue (continue) until a specific condition is satisfied or until a specific timing is reached.

[Operating condition table]
Next, the operation condition table will be described with reference to FIG. The operating condition table is referred to during each preparation. This operation condition table shows a correspondence relationship between the type being prepared and the operation (end) condition set according to the type being prepared.

  For example, when the winning number “18” (abbreviation “F_W7_KP_RT4”) is won during the SBB preparation, the SBB preparation is ended, and the SBB in the first ART (pseudo bonus) is started. In addition, when the winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) are won during the BB preparation, the BB preparation is finished and the first ART is finished (first ART). BB in (bonus) is started.

  If the winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviations “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) are won during the RB preparation, the RB preparation is completed and the first ART (pseudo) bonus is given. RB is started. In addition, during the ART preparation, the winning numbers “18” to “24” (abbreviated names “F_W7_KP_RT4”, “F_KP_R4_R2_1”, “F_KP_R4_R2_2”, “F_KP_R2_R4_1”, “F_KP_R2_R4_1”, “F_R”, “F_K”) The preparation is finished and the second ART is started.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning combination (winning number) that is an ending condition under preparation is won, information (stop order navigation) for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (winning number) is notified. However, even when the stop operation is performed without following the stop order navigation and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination serving as the end condition during preparation is not stopped and displayed, the preparation is completed.

  Therefore, when a stop operation that does not follow the stop order navigation is performed, the RT gaming state does not shift to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state, and the first ART (pseudo bonus) or the second gaming state is set as the sub gaming state. ART is started. As a result, the number of games for managing the first ART (pseudo bonus) and the second ART in the sub gaming state is subtracted without shifting to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

<Configuration of storage area provided in sub-RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of a sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, although explanation is omitted (not shown), various data such as a storage area for registering effect contents and effect numbers and an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) are stored. It also has a storage area.

  The sub storage area has storage areas for “CZ1 flag”, “CZ2 flag”, “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, “RB flag”, “ART flag”, “BR1 flag”, and “RB2 flag”.

  The “CZ1 flag” is a flag indicating whether or not CZ1 is being used. When CZ1 is being used, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “CZ1 flag”. The “CZ2 flag” is a flag indicating whether or not CZ2 is in progress. If it is in CZ2, “1” is stored in the storage area of “CZ2 flag”.

  The “SBB flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the SBB is in the first ART (pseudo bonus). When the SBB is in the middle, “1” is stored in the “SBB flag”. The “BB flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the BB in the first ART is being performed. When the BB is being performed, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “BB flag”. The “RB flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the RB in the first ART is being performed. When the RB is being performed, “1” is stored in the “RB flag”. That is, when the sub gaming state is the first ART, “1” is stored in any one of the storage areas of “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, and “RB flag”.

  The “ART flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the second ART is being performed. When the second ART is being performed, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “ART flag”. .

  The “BR1 flag” is a flag indicating whether or not BR1 is in progress. When BR1 is being used, “1” is stored in the storage area of “BR1 flag”. The “RB2 flag” is a flag indicating whether or not BR2 is in progress. When BR2 is being used, “1” is stored in the storage area of “BR2 flag”. As described above, during BR1 and BR2, 10 games are set as one set, and one set (10 games) of BR is repeated (looped) as long as “BR continuation” continues to be won by continuous lottery.

  The sub storage area includes storage areas for an “additional extra A flag”, “additional extra B flag”, “additional extra C1 flag”, “additional extra C2 flag”, and “additional extra C3 flag”.

  The “additional additional A flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the additional additional G number lottery is the additional additional A. When the type is the additional additional A, the storage area of the “additional additional A flag” “1” is stored. “Additional extra B flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the type of additional extra G number lottery is additional extra B. When the type is additional extra B, the storage area of “additional extra B flag” “1” is stored.

  The “additional additional C1 flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the additional addition G number lottery is the additional addition C1. When the type is the additional addition C1, the storage area of the “additional additional C1 flag” “1” is stored. The “additional extra C2 flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the extra extra G number lottery is the additional extra C2. If the type is the additional extra C2, the storage area of the “additional extra C2 flag” “1” is stored. The “additional additional C3 flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the type of the additional addition G number lottery is the additional addition C3. When the type is the additional addition C3, the storage area of the “additional additional C3 flag” “1” is stored. Note that “1” is stored in the storage area of the “additional additional C3 flag” even after the additional addition C3 is determined and started.

  “CZ1 flag”, “CZ2 flag”, “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, “RB flag”, “ART flag”, “BR1 flag”, “BR2 flag”, “additional addition A flag”, “additional addition” In each storage area of “B flag”, “additional extra C1 flag”, “additional extra C2 flag”, and “additional extra C3 flag”, the execution of the corresponding effect (transition to the corresponding state) is actually determined. “1” is also stored until the start.

  Further, the sub storage area also has storage areas for “CZ1 precursor flag”, “CZ2 precursor flag”, “BB precursor flag”, “RB precursor flag”, “ART precursor flag”, and “BR precursor flag”.

  The “CZ1 precursor flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a CZ1 precursor is present. When the CZ1 precursor flag is present, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “CZ1 precursor flag”. The “CZ2 precursor flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a CZ2 precursor is present. When the CZ2 precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “CZ2 precursor flag”.

  The “BB precursor flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a BB (SBB) precursor is in progress. When the BB (SBB) precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “BB precursor flag”. Stored. The “RB precursor flag” is a flag indicating whether or not an RB precursor is present. When the RB precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “RB precursor flag”.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus has been won, any one of “SBB”, “BB”, and “RB” is determined as the type of the pseudo bonus. However, as a gaming machine according to the present invention, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus has been won, only the type is determined to be “RB”, and if it is determined not to be “RB”, It may be determined whether the pseudo bonus is set to “SBB” or “BB” at the end of the BB sign.

  The “ART precursor flag” is a flag indicating whether or not an ART (second ART) precursor is being used. If the ART precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “ART precursor flag”. Stored. The “BR precursor flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a BR precursor is present. When the BR precursor is being used, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “BR precursor flag”.

  In addition, the sub storage area includes storage areas of “SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag”, “RB preparing flag”, and “ART preparing flag”.

  The “SBB preparing flag” is a flag indicating whether the SBB is being prepared. When the SBB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “SBB preparing flag”. The “BB preparing flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the BB is being prepared. When the BB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “BB preparing flag”.

  The “RB preparation flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the RB is being prepared. When the RB is being prepared, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “RB preparation flag”. The “ART ready flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the ART is being prepared. When the ART is being prepared, “1” is stored in the storage area of the “ART ready flag”.

  In the present embodiment, “in preparation” conceptually indicates a section in which a predetermined state is determined to be started but cannot be started because the start condition is not satisfied. During preparation, it is similar to a warning sign, but unlike a warning sign, it actively encourages the start condition to be met. For example, when the generation of ART is determined, in order to start the ART, it is necessary to simultaneously generate AT and RT. Since AT is managed by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), it can be started immediately, but RT is managed by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8). However, since communication from the sub-control circuit 101 to the main control circuit 91 is impossible, generally, “RT for satisfying the RT start condition by the main control circuit 91” is performed indirectly to perform RT. Encourage the start of That is, in general, a difference period generated between the AT start timing by the sub-control circuit 101 and the RT start timing by the main control circuit 91 is a section referred to as being prepared.

  Therefore, if the determination of the ART end condition is started at the start of the AT, the ART period includes a period during which only the AT operates. The period may end. Such a game machine makes the player uncomfortable and makes design development difficult because the ART period assumed at the time of development (when the end condition is set) differs from the actual ART period. It becomes a factor. Therefore, an AT is performed from the start of AT until the RT (main control circuit 91 side) condition is satisfied, but AT is performed, but this period is set to the ART period by not determining the end condition of ART. Do not include. Since this section is a section in which ART is being prepared, this section is referred to as “in preparation” in this specification.

  In addition, the sub storage area includes “CZ game number counter”, “pseudo bonus game number counter”, “ART game number counter”, “BR game number counter”, “additional additional game number counter”, and “additional game number counter”. ”Storage area.

  The value of “CZ game number counter” is incremented by “1” every time a game is played in CZ1 or CZ2, and the value of “CZ game number counter” is cleared when CZ1 or CZ2 ends. The number of games (“30”, “60”, or “100”) set according to the type of the pseudo bonus is set in the “pseudo-bonus game number counter” before the pseudo bonus is started.

  Then, the value of the “pseudo bonus in-game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game is played in the first ART (pseudo bonus). When a numerical value is stored in a storage area of a “BB medium / high probability counter” described later, the subtraction of the “pseudo bonus medium game number counter” is stopped.

  “50” is set in the “ART game number counter” before the second ART is started. The value of the “ART game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game is played in the second ART. In the “BR game number counter”, “10” is set before BR1 or BR2 is started. The value of the “BR game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game is played in BR1 or BR2.

  “2” is set in the “additional added game number counter” before the game related to the additional addition effect is started. Then, the value of the “additional additional game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game related to the additional addition effect is performed.

  The “additional game number counter” is provided as a temporary storage counter until the total number of additional games is determined when additional addition is performed. Therefore, the determined number of added games is added to the value of the “additional game number counter” every time the number of added games is determined in the additional addition.

  In addition, the sub storage area includes “CI (cut-in) number counter in CZ”, “BB medium / high probability counter”, “predictor game number counter”, “preparing digest G number counter”, “internal point counter”, “ It has storage areas for “causal value counter” and “causal value stock counter”.

  In the “CI counter in CZ”, “4” is set before CZ1 is started, and “10” is set before CZ2 is started. Then, the value of the “CI counter in CZ” is decremented by “1” every time “navigating to the black BAR” (cut-in effect) occurs.

  In the “BB medium / high probability counter”, when the additional G number related to the first ART (pseudo bonus) is determined by the extra number of G numbers in the BB, the determined additional G number is added. When a numerical value is stored in the storage area of the “BB medium / high probability counter”, the first ART (pseudo bonus) is in a high probability state. In the high probability state in the first ART, the probability that the winning of the second ART is determined is higher than that in the normal first ART.

  In the “predictor game number counter”, the number of precursor games in each precursor is set before each precursor is started. Then, the value of the “predictor game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time a game for each precursor is performed. “1” is added to the value of the “preparing digested G number counter” every time a game is played during each preparation, and the value of the “preparing digested G number counter” is cleared when each preparation is completed. .

  When the internal point is determined by the internal point lottery, the value of the determined internal point is added to the “internal point counter”. When the “causal value” is determined based on the total of the internal points and the “provisional causal value”, the value determined as the “causal value” is subtracted from the value of the “internal point counter”.

  When the “causal value” is determined by the causal value lottery, the determined “causal value” is added to the “causal value counter”. When the value of the “causal value counter” exceeds “100”, “100” is subtracted from the value of the “causal value counter”, and “1” is added to the value of the “causal value stock counter”. The “causal value counter” and the “causal value stock counter” are specific examples of causal value accumulation means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

  Further, the sub storage area includes a storage area of “BR continuation flag”, “BR successive storage area”, and “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”.

  The “BR continuation flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started. When it is determined that the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, the “BR continuation flag” is set. “1” is stored in the storage area.

  The “BR subsequent storage area” is an area in which data indicating whether BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set is stored. When it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set, “1” is stored in the “BR subsequent storage area”.

  In the present embodiment, special BR continuous lottery is performed separately from the BR continuous lottery. When special BR continuation is won in the special BR continuation lottery, it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another. In addition, when it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, a dedicated effect for informing whether or not the special BR is “continuation” is performed.

  “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32” are areas in which data indicating whether or not execution of BR1 or BR2 is determined is stored. When execution of BR1 is determined, “1” is stored in any one of “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”. If execution of BR2 is determined, “2” is stored in any one of “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of main operation processing of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when power is turned on to the pachi-slot 1, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the time of power-on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally or the setting has been changed appropriately, and an initialization process corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the main CPU 93 clears the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area that requires erasure of data for each game, such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the medal sensor and the input of the start switch 64 are checked. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts random values (0 to 65535), and stores the extracted random values in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts an effect random number value used in the reel effect and lock control in the “continuous lock state”, and uses the extracted effect random number value in the effect random value storage area (not stored) provided in the main RAM 95. (S5). In the present embodiment, an effect random number value 1, an effect random number value 2, and an effect random number value 3 are provided as effect random number values. Each of the production random numbers 1 to 3 is extracted from the range of 0 to 65535.

  When the extracted various random number values are stored in a predetermined random value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). Details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S8). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 101. Note that the start command includes a parameter for specifying an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game start lock process (S10). In this process, the reel effect and lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of reel effect and lock performed in the “continuous lock state” determined in the process of S7 are mainly executed. Details of the game start lock process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a wait process (S11). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel rotation start processing (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 99, which will be described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, rotation of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a drawing priority order storing process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 45) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41). In this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped, and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), Is matched. Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the active line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal payout processing (S16). The medal payout process shows a specific example of the game medium giving means according to the present invention. In this process, the hopper device 43 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S15, and medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), the number of inserted medals is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum payout. The number of sheets (payout upper limit) is 14 sheets.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT gaming state. Details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs payout end command transmission processing (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game with reference to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. Details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S31). The presence / absence of the automatic insertion request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic insertion counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to re-playing has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S31 that there is an automatic loading request (when S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs automatic loading processing (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S31 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIGS. 3 and 7) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper device 43.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets to “3”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When the main CPU 93 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is not permitted (when S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when a medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 101 (S37). The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted coins.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S38 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

  After S32, when S35 is NO or when S38 is YES, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 64 is on (S39). In S39, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 64 is not on (when S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch 64 is on (when S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIGS. 3 and 7) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 18. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. In the present embodiment, internal lottery processing using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means for executing internal lottery processing (internal winning combination determining means).

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and determines the type and number of lottery of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 18). decide. The number of lotteries indicates the number of times of lottery value subtraction and determination of whether or not a digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery value change processing (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a random number value stored in the random value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

  In S45, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the main CPU 93 makes the value of the operation result a random value and adds 1 to the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S47). In S47, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the process of S45 again, in S45, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when S45 is YES), the main CPU 93 In accordance with the winning number, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S49).

  After the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 28) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S51).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S55 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” in S52 (when S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the bonus internal winning combination determination table ( Referring to FIG. 24), an internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S54).

  After the process of S54 or when S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S55).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CB gaming state (S56). In S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the CB gaming state (when S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S56 that the main CPU 93 is in the CB gaming state (when S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area ( S57). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Lottery value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) to determine whether or not the RT gaming state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is set in any of the bits 0 to 4 in the gaming state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 42). In S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state flag is not on (in the case where S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and the process is an internal lottery process (see FIG. 80). ) To S43.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT gaming state flag is on (when S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines that the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the RT gaming state that is on. Referring to FIG. 5, the lottery value of the winning number (“1” to “24”) related to replaying in the internal gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 19) is changed (S62). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and moves the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. The game lock lottery process is a specific example of the lock lottery means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S8.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state in S71 (when S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) and performs the effect. A game lock lottery is performed based on the random value 1 (S72).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock is won in the game lock lottery of S72 (S73). When the main CPU 93 determines in S73 that the game lock is not won (when S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and the process proceeds to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S73 that the main CPU 93 has won the game lock (when S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets a game lock flag and a lock timer (S74). As a result, a game lock is generated. That is, the process of S74 shows a specific example of the lock generating means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. Then, after the processing of S74, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery processing, and moves the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation stop number selection table (see FIG. 29), and acquires the rotation stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. (S101).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 30 and 31), and acquires various information corresponding to the rotation stop number based on the acquired rotation stop number (S102). . Specifically, the main CPU 93, corresponding to the acquired spinning cylinder stop number, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push Time table change initial data and irregular pressing time table selection data are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S103).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores “3” in the stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S104). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock process at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. The lock process at the start of the game shows a first specific example of the in-lock effect determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). The reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag of the present embodiment is data for reel effect in which a time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) and a time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation) are set as one set. When this reel effect pattern is set, the time for one set is set in the lock timer.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is “0” (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is not “0” (when S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S112 until the value of the lock timer becomes “0”. stand by.

  When the reel effect pattern during the game lock is a time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation), the same process as the rotation process (acceleration process) for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in order to perform a normal game is performed. Done. As a result, when the reel effect pattern during the game lock is a time retrograde reel action, it is the same as the reel action from when the start operation is performed to when the stop button is activated when performing a normal game. . Therefore, the player cannot determine whether or not a game lock has occurred immediately after the start operation (lever on). Further, when the reel effect pattern is a time retrograde reel action (after a stop operation), a rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in reverse is performed.

  When the reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag is set and a certain amount of time elapses after the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) is executed, the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation) is started. That is, when the rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in a forward direction is performed for a predetermined time, the rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction is performed thereafter.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game lock is started, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate (time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation)) as in a normal game. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not a game lock has been generated immediately after the start operation, and to maintain a sense of expectation for the occurrence of a game lock.

  In the present embodiment, as a certain time during which the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) is performed, the time from when the player tilts the start lever 16 to the stop operation in the normal game (the start operation is performed). It is set a little longer than the time from when it is performed until the stop button is activated. Thus, if the player performs a stop operation immediately after the time until the stop button is activated, the player can be given an illusion that a game lock has occurred immediately after the stop operation.

  As a result, if it is assumed that a normal game has started based on detection of the start operation (lever on), the player can be suddenly recognized (misidentified) as if a game lock has occurred, and the game lock The production effect can be enhanced. In addition, although the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are thought to be stopped by the stop operation, the stop operation is actually invalid and the time retroactive reel action (after the stop operation) is executed, which is a big surprise to the player. It can be felt and the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S112 that the value of the lock timer is “0” (when S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the game start lock process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( Move to S11 of FIG.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the drawing priority order storing process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S121). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as a search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S122 again, next, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (the small combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. Details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the symbol position data and sets “21” as the symbol check count (S124). Then, the main CPU 93 performs symbol code storage processing (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. Details of the symbol code storing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 41) based on the acquired symbol code and the data in the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 45) (S126). At this time, regardless of whether or not an internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIG. 12 to FIG. 15) may be obtained by collation. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 93 draws in priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to the ranking table (see FIG. 37), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  In addition, when symbols of a combination (“C_B_CH_A” to “C_B_CH_D”, “C_C_CH” shown in FIG. 15) related to a combination (for example, “Cherry”) in which a winning is confirmed in some reels are displayed. For the reel that is “ANY”, the pull-in priority data of the combination is not acquired. Further, when there is a possibility that a winning combination that is not won internally is determined on a reel for which winning is determined, the drawing priority data is set to “prohibit stop (all bits 0)”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in the pull-in priority data storage area (see FIG. 46) (S128). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area. Next, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S129).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). In S130, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when S130 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches has been searched (S131).

  In S131, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of times of search (when S131 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of times of search (if S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process, and the process is S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a description will be given of the attraction priority table selection process performed at S123 in the attraction priority order storage processing flowchart (see FIG. 85).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a pull-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not a pull-in priority table number is stored directly in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is set (when S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority table selection process and stores the pull-in priority order. The process proceeds to S124 of the process (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is not set in S141 (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button. Referring to the area (see FIG. 43), the corresponding drawing priority table number is set (S142). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S124 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 85).

  In S142, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data, and acquires the drawing priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S125 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S151). In this embodiment, the effective line (winning determination line) is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets check symbol position data for the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S153). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storing process, and moves the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storing process (see FIG. 85).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means for executing reel stop control processing (stop control means).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). In S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (when S161 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S161, and a valid stop button pressing operation is executed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S161 that a valid stop button has been pressed (in the case where S161 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 44). 43) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the stop button non-operating counter by 1 (S163).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S165).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub-control circuit 101 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch. Note that the ON / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 95 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position determined in S168 as a search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 87 (S170). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (when S173 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the processing of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S173 that the pressed stop button has been released (YES in S173), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the inoperative counter is not “0” (in the case where S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 85 (S176). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inoperative counter is “0” in S175 (when S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 78). (Refer to S15).

[Sliding piece number determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on a line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “10000000” in which bit 7 corresponding to “left reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. Select. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects “00010000” in which “1” is set in bit 4 corresponding to “middle reel A line” of the stop data as the line mask data. To do. For example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects “00000010” in which bit 1 corresponding to “right reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). In S182, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the first stop (when S182 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). Details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S182 that the main CPU 93 is the first stop (when S182 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button is a left stop button (S184).

  In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 obtains the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the forward selection table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 30 and 31). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the first press stop table corresponding to the forward press table selection data, and acquires the sliding piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S184 that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 obtains the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table selection. An irregular pressing stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIGS. 30 and 31).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S188). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs line mask data change processing (S189). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the set table for stopping irregular pressing, and acquires the number of pieces of sliding piece determination based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

  After the process of S183, S186, or S190, the main CPU 93 performs a priority pull-in control process (S191). In this process, the drawing priority order data corresponding to each symbol position in the range from the stop start position to the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” is compared, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and moves the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). In S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not during the second stop operation (when S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the main CPU 93 is at the time of the second stop operation (when S201 is YES), the main CPU 93 presses the stop buttons in order (first reel is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press (when S202 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is a forward press (when S202 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S203). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs line mask data change processing (S204). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding frame number search process (S205). In this process, referring to the stop table (FIGS. 32, 34, and 35), the number of pieces of slip piece determination data is determined based on the stop start position.

  For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to “middle reel A line”, the main CPU 93 refers to the column of “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not the corresponding data is “1” for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols from the stop start position. Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the number of sliding pieces determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processing, and moves the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 91, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the sliding piece number determination process and in S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The check process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change status is “1” or “2” (S211). In S211, when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is “1” or “2” (when S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in this embodiment, when the change status is “1”, the A line status is set, and when the change status is “2”, the B line status is set. Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89), or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In S204.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that the change status is not “1” or “2” (when S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the column corresponding to “middle reel line change bit” or “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is stored. It is determined whether or not “1”. When the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not “1”, that is, the line change bit is not on (when S213 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process. The process is shifted to S189 in the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S213 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is ON (when S213 is YES), the main CPU 93 The line status is set (S214). The B line status is data used for changing the line mask data. After the process of S214, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check process, and the process is S189 of the slip piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). ) In S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 92, the line mask data to be executed in S189 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the sliding piece number determination process and in S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The change process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). Note that the setting of the C line status is performed in the case of forward pressing in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 95) described later.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is set in S221 (when S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button. A determination is made (S222).

  In S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button (when S222 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data twice to the right (S223). ). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is a middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop is a right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00000010” to “10000000” by the process of S223. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the “right reel C line data” of the stop table for second and third stops (see FIG. 35) at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In S205.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S222 that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when S222 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00010000” to “01000000” by the process of S224. As a result, the column of bit 6 corresponding to the “middle reel C line data” of the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In S205.

  In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S225). . In S225, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is not set (in the case where S225 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data changing process, and the process is determined as the number of sliding frames (see FIG. 89) or S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is set in S225 (when S225 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data once to the right (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is “00000010”, it is changed to “00000001”. As a result, the column corresponding to “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a search order table (see FIG. 38) according to the gaming state (S231). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, “5” is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the start address of a stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S233).

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of sliding frames to the expected stop start address, and acquires pull-in priority data (S235).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S236 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S236 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (in the case where S236 is YES), the main CPU 93 detects the slip acquired in S234. The number of frames is saved (S237).

  Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the number of checks by 1, and increments the search order counter by 1 (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (when S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is “0” in S239 (when S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of sliding symbols that have been retreated (S240). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). When the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is after the third stop (when S251 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and the process is S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is not after the third stop (when S251 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). When the main CPU 93 determines in S252 that it is after the second stop (when S252 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a control process after the second stop (S253). Details of the second post-stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the process of S253, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S252 that the main CPU 93 is not after the second stop (when S252 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S254). In S254, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press (when S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S254 that the main CPU 93 is a forward press (when S254 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 33). And the number of searches is set (S255).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a planned stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired planned stop position (S257).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the planned stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated change target position does not match the scheduled stop position (when S258 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches is “0”. (S259). In S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is not “0” (when S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is “0” in S259 (when S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the second- Obtained as the third stop table number and set the corresponding stop table (S260).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). After the process of S261, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

  In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated change target position coincides with the scheduled stop position (when S258 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the second pressing operation according to the value of the line change status. The third stop table number and C line check data are acquired (S262).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing (S263). After the process of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the control change process flowchart (see FIG. 94) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S271). In S271, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a forward press (when S271 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94). To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 93 is a forward press (when S271 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the C line check data is on (change status is “3”) or not. Is determined (S272). The C line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 94). In S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is not ON (in the case where S272 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and the control change process (FIG. 94) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on in S272 (when S272 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop. It is determined whether or not (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not ON (when S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 94) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S273 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (in the case where S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the stored forward pressing. “1” is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the second post-stop control change process and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and checks RT game state transition conditions that can be established in the transition source (current) RT game state (S281).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state transition condition is not satisfied (when S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S282 that the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (when S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and transitions. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the transfer destination is set to a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs display command transmission processing (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 101. The display command includes parameters that specify a display combination, a payout number, and the like. Then, after the process of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control process and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “MB” (“MB1” or “MB2”) is in operation with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is not operating (when S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is in operation in S321 (when S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. Is discriminated (S322).

  In S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (when S322 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs bonus end time processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the gaming state flag (MB gaming state flag) corresponding to the active “MB”. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the number of medals paid out exceeds 13 during the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus end command to the sub-control circuit 101. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the process of S325, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” in S322 (when S322 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets each value of the winning number counter and the possible game number counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is decremented by “1” when a small role (a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the possible number of games counter is “1” for one game regardless of the stop symbol. Subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is not “0” (when S327 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. The process proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S327 that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (when S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs processing at the end of the CB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game state flag (CB game state flag) corresponding to “CB” and clearing the values of the winning possible number counter and the possible gaming number counter are performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “MB” (“MB1” or “MB2”) is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is not in operation (S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S334 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is operating in S331 (when S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether “CB” is operating (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that “CB” is in operation (in the case where S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that “CB” is not in operation (when S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs CB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 16). (S333). After the process of S333, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  When S331 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is winning (S334). In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” is displayed as a bonus game winning. In S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not a winning game (when S334 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S338 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is a win in S334 (when S334 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the winning bonus game based on the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16). A corresponding bonus activation process is performed (S335). In this embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 16), sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“13”). Further, in this process, the CB operation process described in S333 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. After the process of S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  When S334 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to replaying (replay) is a winning (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination relating to replay is not winning (when S338 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, in S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to replaying is a win (when S338 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S339, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, for example, interrupt processing by control of the main CPU 93 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch on the stop switch board 65 are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S344). In this processing, various commands are mainly transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 as appropriate.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. Three stepping motors are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S345, not only the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process and stop process, but also a reel effect pattern is set when the reel effect pattern is set during the acceleration process. Reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing are also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls the 7-segment display 23 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S347). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main board communication task]
First, a main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks reception of a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S501). Next, when receiving a command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command type is normal (S503). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with one of a plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the type of the command is one of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the processing of S503, if the received command type code is one of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal. On the other hand, if the command type code is other than a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including an illegal act) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is not a normal command type.

  In S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is not normal (when S503 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S503 that the type of command is normal (when S503 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). . The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, an effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 extracts a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S512 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S515 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S512 that there is a message in the message queue (when S512 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as the internal winning combination, the type of reel that has stopped rotating, the display combination, and the game state flag specified by the parameters are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub-RAM 103. The

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs effect content determination processing (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the contents of the effect, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers lamp data (S517). These registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process in S514. After the process of S517, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S511 and repeats the processes after S511.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a start command reception time (S521).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S521 that the start command is being received (when S521 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a start command receiving process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect random number, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers it. Here, the production number is data for designating the content of the production to be executed this time. Details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the production data at the start according to the registered production number (S523). The effect data is data that designates animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and effects such as display of video are executed. Then, after the process of S523, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S521 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a start command (when S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a reel stop command reception (S524).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S524 that the reel stop command is being received (when S524 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a reel stop command receiving process (S525). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery when the additional addition B flag is on. Details of the reel stop command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the production data at the time of stop according to the registered production number and the type of the operation stop button (S526). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S524 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving the reel stop command (NO in S524), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is receiving the display command (S527).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S527 that the display command is being received (when S527 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers display effect data according to the registered effect number and display combination. (S528). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S527 that the display command is not received (when S527 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the payout end command is received (S529). In S529, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is time to receive a payout end command (when S529 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs payout end command reception processing (S530). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S529 that it is not at the time of receiving the payout end command (NO in S529), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the time of receiving the bonus start command (S531).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S531 that the bonus start command is being received (S531 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers bonus start effect data (S532). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S531 that the bonus start command is not received (when S531 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command is received (S533). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S533 that the bonus end command is being received (S533 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers bonus end effect data (S534). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S533 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a bonus end command (NO in S533), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a no-operation command reception (S535). In S535, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a no-operation command reception (when S535 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and the process of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101). Move to S515.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S535 that the sub CPU 102 is receiving a no-operation command (when S535 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process when no operation command is received (S536). The details of the non-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S536, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the process at the time of start command reception performed in S522 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described. In the present embodiment, the start command reception process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is being performed (S541). During the pseudo bonus (first ART), any of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S541 that the pseudo bonus is being performed (in the case where S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo bonus process (S542). The details of the pseudo bonus mid-process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S541 that the sub CPU 102 is not in a pseudo bonus (when S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in ART (second ART) (S543). . During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

  In S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is in progress (when S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART processing (S544). Details of the ART processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S543 that the sub CPU 102 is not in the ART (second ART) (when S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs normal middle processing (S545). Note that details of the normal middle processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

  After the process of S542, S544, or S545, the sub CPU 102 performs a process in preparation (S546). Details of the preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a precursor check process (S547). Details of the warning check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect lottery process (S548). Details of the effect lottery processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. After the process of S548, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command, and moves the process to S523 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102).

[Processing during pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the process during the pseudo bonus performed in S542 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus preparation flag is on (S561). As described above, the SBB preparation flag, the BB preparation flag, and the RB preparation flag are provided as the pseudo bonus preparation flag. Accordingly, in S561, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any of the SBB preparing flag, the BB preparing flag, and the RB preparing flag is on.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S561 that the pseudo bonus preparation flag is on (when S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied. A determination is made (S562). The start condition corresponding to the SBB preparation flag is that the winning number “18” (abbreviated as “F_W7_KP_RT4”) is won in the internal lottery process. The start conditions corresponding to the BB preparing flag and the RB preparing flag are winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviations “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) in the internal lottery process. One is to win.

  In S562, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition corresponding to each ready flag is satisfied (when S562 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo bonus start process (S563).

  In the process at the start of the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 turns off the preparation flag corresponding to the started pseudo bonus, and the value corresponding to the started pseudo bonus (“100”, “60” or “ “30”) is set. In addition, the sub CPU 102 clears the preparation digestion G number counter. After the process of S563, the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus medium process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S562 that the start condition corresponding to each of the preparation flags is not satisfied (when S562 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus in-process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S546 in the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  Here, returning to S561 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S561 that the pseudo bonus preparation flag is not on (if S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the BB flag on. It is determined whether or not (S564). In S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is not on (in the case where S564 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S570 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S564 that the BB flag is on (in the case where S564 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is on the basis of the G number addition lottery table (see FIG. 54). A lottery process is performed with the G number added (S565). This G number addition lottery process in BB shows one specific example of the addition game number lottery means in the assist state according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the BB medium G number lottery process, when the number of additional games is determined, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined value to the BB medium high probability counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery process during BB based on the ART lottery table during BB (see FIG. 55), or BR lottery during BB based on the BR (battle rush) lottery table during BB (see FIG. 56). Processing is performed (S566). The BB ART lottery process and the BB BR lottery process show a first specific example of the benefit determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. Further, the BB ART lottery processing also serves as a first specific example of the assist state lottery means according to the present invention.

  Specifically, it is a non-ART BB and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to any of the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, and “11”) by internal lottery processing. Is determined as an internal winning combination, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART lottery process during BB. Also, a special internal winning combination (an internal winning combination corresponding to any of the winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, and “11”) is an internal winning combination by BB in ART. Is determined, the sub CPU 102 performs BR lottery processing.

  In the BB ART lottery process, when “ART winning” is determined, the sub CPU 102 turns on the “ART flag” (stores “1” in the “ART flag”). Further, in the BR lottery process during BB, when “Battle Rush 1 Win” is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores “1” in the “BR stock storage area”. When “Battle Rush 2 Win” is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores “2” in the “BR stock storage area”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery result in S566 is a win (S567). That is, it is determined whether any one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning” and “Battle rush 2 winning” has been determined.

  In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a win (when S567 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “reverse-pressed navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” (S568). Note that “reverse pressing” in the present embodiment means that the stop order is “middle right” or “middle right”.

  The above-described special internal winning combination is an internal winning combination corresponding to any of the winning numbers (small pointer / replay data pointer) “7”, “8”, “10”, and “11”. In the present embodiment, when the winning number (small role / replay data pointer) is any one of “7”, “8”, “10”, and “11”, the stop order is “middle right” or “ The combination of symbols corresponding to any one of “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P” is stopped and displayed on the condition that “right middle left”.

  When the combination of symbols corresponding to “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P” is stopped and displayed, “white BAR” − “white BAR” − along a straight line extending over the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. The combination of symbols of “white BAR” can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined, “reverse pushing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is performed. .

  Stop operation is performed in accordance with “reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)”, and the combination of symbols of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is stopped and displayed along a straight line. Then, the player can recognize that any one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning” and “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined. At this time, if it is a non-ART BB, "ART winning" is determined, and if it is BB during ART, "battle rush 1 winning" or "battle rush 2 winning" is determined.

  Even if the data pointer (winning number) for the small role / replay is “7”, “8”, “10” or “11”, “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning” and “ If none of the “battle rush 2 wins” is determined, “reverse push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is not performed. In other words, even if the combination of symbols of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” can be stopped, any one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning” and “Battle rush 2 winning” Is not determined, “reverse-push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB is performed. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, even when an internal winning combination other than a special internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process, the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB may be performed.

  For example, when an internal winning combination other than a special internal winning combination is determined and one of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning” and “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined, When the internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, “reverse pushing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is performed. That is, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is subsequently determined as an internal winning combination, regardless of the result of the ART lottery process during BB or the BR lottery process during BB, Navigation (Aiming at the white BAR) ”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S567 that the sub CPU 102 is not the winner (when S567 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a reverse reverse lottery based on the reverse reverse lottery table (not shown) (S569). ). In the present embodiment, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the rasp reverse push lottery is performed. When “gase reverse pressing win” is determined, “reverse pressing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is performed.

  When the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the ART lottery process during BB and the BR lottery process during BB are not performed. Accordingly, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, none of “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning” and “Battle rush 2 winning” is determined.

  When the small combination / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, “C_HOM_B” to “C_HOM_J” and “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” are determined as the internal winning combination. (See FIGS. 25 and 26). When the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” are provided on the condition that the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left”. The combination of symbols corresponding to is stopped and displayed.

  Accordingly, when the small role / replay data pointer is “6” or “9”, the stop order is “right left middle” or “right middle left” as “reverse-push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)”. Even so, the combination of symbols “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is not stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that neither “ART winning”, “Battle rush 1 winning”, or “Battle rush 2 winning” has been determined.

  When “C_HOM_B”, “C_HOM_E” to “C_HOM_G” are determined as internal winning combinations, if the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing, “white BAR” − “white” is used until the second stop. The combination of symbols “BAR”-“white BAR” is a stop mode (so-called “tempe”) that can be stopped and displayed along a straight line. In the third stop, the symbol combination of “white BAR”-“white BAR”-“white BAR” is not stopped and displayed.

  After the processing of S568 or S569, or when S564 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RB flag is on (S570).

  In S570, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RB flag is on (when S570 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an RB ART lottery process based on an RB ART lottery table (not shown). Alternatively, the RB BR lottery process is performed based on the RB BR lottery table (not shown) (S571). The RB ART lottery process and the RB BR lottery process show a second specific example of the benefit determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. Further, the RB ART lottery processing also serves as the second specific example of the assist state lottery means according to the present invention.

  Specifically, when the RB is in a non-ART state and the small role / replay data pointer (winning number) is any one of “7”, “8”, “10”, and “11”, the RB The lottery process for the number of medium ART sets is performed. On the other hand, if it is an RB in ART and the small role / replay data pointer (winning number) is any one of “7”, “8”, “10” and “11”, the BR lottery processing in RB I do.

  After the processing of S571, or when S570 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB middle / high probability counter is 1 or more (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB medium / high probability counter is 1 or more (when S572 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the BB medium / high probability counter (S573). .

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S572 that the BB medium / high probability counter is not 1 or more (when S572 is NO), the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the pseudo bonus medium game number counter by “1” ( S574).

  After the processing of S573 or S574, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter is 1 or more (S575). In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the counter game number during pseudo bonus is 1 or more (when S 575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during pseudo bonus and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the time process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, in S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the pseudo bonus in-game number counter is not 1 or more (in the case where S575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo bonus end process (S576).

  In the process at the end of the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 turns off the flag corresponding to the type of the pseudo bonus that has ended. Further, when the ART flag is on and the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART start process. If the type of the pseudo bonus that has been ended is SBB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART flag and performs ART start processing. When “1” or “2” is stored in the BR stock storage area, the sub CPU 102 performs BR start processing. This BR start time process shows a specific example of the special set game start means according to the present invention. After the process of S576, the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus medium process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the processing during ART performed in S544 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (S581). The BR flag is one of the BR flag 1 and the BR flag 2.

  In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is not off (when S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) Bonus lottery processing is performed (S582). The bonus lottery process is a specific example of assist state determination means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

  When “bonus winning” is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus distribution lottery process based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of the pseudo bonus. Then, the sub CPU 102 sets a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) corresponding to the determined pseudo bonus, and a preparation flag (“SBB preparation flag”, “BB preparation flag” or “ “RB ready flag”) is turned on.

  After the process of S582, the sub CPU 102 performs an extra lottery process based on an extra lottery table (not shown) (S583). When the number of additional games is determined by this additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. In S583, the sub CPU 102 may perform the BR lottery process separately from the extra lottery process.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “preparing flag (ART preparing flag)” is ON (S584). In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag is on (in the case where S584 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and starts the process when a start command is received (see FIG. 103). To S546.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S584 that the preparation flag is not on (when S584 is NO), the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the ART game number counter by “1” (S585). After the processing of S585, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  Here, returning to S581 again, in S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (in the case where S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds an additional extra game. It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is 1 or more (S586).

  In S586, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” or more (when S586 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the additional added game number counter from “1”. (S587). Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional additional game number counter is “1” and the additional additional A flag is on (S588).

  In S588, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” and the additional added A flag is ON (when S588 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the additional added A amount. G number lottery processing is performed (S589). In the additional addition A addition G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional addition A addition G number lottery table (see FIG. 61), and adds the determined addition game number to the ART game number counter. . After the processing of S589, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  In S588, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional additional game number counter is “1” and the additional additional A flag is not on (when S588 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional additional games. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is “0” (S590).

  In S590, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “0” (when S590 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S590 that the value of the additional added game number counter is “0” (when S590 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional added C flag (“addition added C1 flag”). , “Additional extra C2 flag” or “additional extra C3 flag”) is determined (S591). In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional extra C flag is not on (when S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S595 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S591 that the additional extra C flag is on (when S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an extra extra C extra G number lottery process (S592). The additional extra C extra G number lottery processing of S592 shows a specific example of the automatic additional extra lottery related to the gaming machine of the present invention. That is, the additional extra C extra G number lottery process of S592 is performed on the start lever 16 before the additional extra C extra G number lottery process based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 (one bet button 15) is completed. It is executed when

  In the additional extra C extra G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the extra game number based on the additional extra C extra G number lottery table (see FIG. 63), and adds the determined extra game number to the extra game number counter. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is “continuation” (S593). When “1” or more is determined as the additional game number by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing of S592, “continuation” is set, and “0” is added as the additional game number by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing. If determined, “no continuation” is set.

  In S593, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is “continuation” (when S593 is YES), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S592, and adds the additional game C addition G number lottery process of S592 as the additional game number. The processes of S592 and S593 are repeated until “0” is determined. It should be noted that even if the number of times of performing the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing reaches a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), “no continuation” is determined and the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing is terminated. Good. Further, when the number of times of performing the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing reaches the specified number of times, even if the lottery result is “continuation”, the sub CPU 102 determines “no continuation”, The additional addition C addition G number lottery processing may be terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not “continuation” in S593 (in the case where S593 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition C end time process (S594). In the process at the time of completion of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 selects the corresponding additional addition flag ("addition addition A flag", "addition addition B flag", "addition addition C1 flag", "addition addition C2 flag", or "addition addition C3"). Flag ") off. Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter, and clears the value of the additional game number counter.

  After the process of S594 or when S591 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a BR continuation process (S595). Details of the BR continuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S595, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  Here, the process returns to S586 again, and in S586, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (when S586 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the BR continuation flag. It is determined whether or not “1” or more (S596).

  In S596, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is “1” or more (when S596 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition during the BR and promotion lottery processing (S597).

  In the additional addition and promotion lottery processing during BR, the sub CPU 102 determines the addition content based on the additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR (see FIG. 60), and adds an additional addition flag (“additional addition” corresponding to the determined addition content). "A flag", "Additional addition B flag", "Additional addition C1 flag", "Additional addition C2 flag" or "Additional addition C3 flag").

  Note that only one of the above-described various additional additions is turned on as the additional addition flag. In addition, even if the additional addition moves up, it does not move down. For example, if the added content determined this time is higher than the previously determined added content, the additional added flag corresponding to the previously determined added content is turned off, and the additional added flag corresponding to the added content determined this time is turned on. . On the other hand, if the added content determined this time is lower than the previously determined added content, the additional added flag corresponding to the previously determined added content is kept on.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S596 that the BR continuation flag is not “1” or more (when S596 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuous rewriting lottery process (S598).

  In the BR continuous rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery as to whether or not to rewrite “non-continuous” of BR to “continuous” based on a BR continuous rewriting lottery table (not shown). If it is determined to replace “non-continuation” of BR with “continuation”, BR continuation processing is performed (see FIG. 107 described later).

  After the processing of S597 or S598, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the BR game number counter (S599). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR game number counter is “1” or more (S600). In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is “1” or more (when S600 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and starts the process when the start command is received ( The process proceeds to S546 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S600 that the BR game number counter is not “1” or more (when S600 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR continuation flag is “1” or more. Is discriminated (S601).

  In S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not “1” or more (when S601 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a BR end time process (S602). In the BR end process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR flag (“BR1 flag 1” or “BR2 flag”). Further, when the flag that is turned off is the “BR2 flag”, or when the number of BR continuations is a predetermined number (for example, “20 or more”), the sub CPU 102 prepares for the “SBB flag” and “SBB preparation”. “Flag” and “BR1 flag” are turned on. That is, the BR end process shows a specific example of the benefit granting means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. After the process of S602, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is “1” or more in S601 (when S601 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process for adding the BR continuation (S603). In the BR continuing addition lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of added games based on the BR continuing addition lottery table (not shown), and adds the determined number of added games to the value of the ART game number counter. Note that in the BR lottery adding lottery process according to the present embodiment, “0” is not determined as the number of additional games, and a predetermined number (eg, “10”) or more is determined. In addition, the BR lottery addition lottery processing is a specific example of the addition game number lottery means according to the present invention.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional addition flag is on (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional extra flag is on (when S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “2” to the value of the additional extra game number counter (S605). After the processing of S605, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S604 that the additional extra flag is not on (when S604 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuation processing (S606). Details of the BR continuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S606, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[BR continuation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the BR continuation process performed in S595 or S606 in the flowchart of the ART process (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described. This BR continuation time process shows a specific example of the special set game continuation lottery means according to the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR continuation flag (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds “10” to the value of the BR game number counter (S622). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BR continuation flag is “1” (S623).

  In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation flag is “1” (when S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag and stores “ 2 ”is set (stored) (S624). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S627 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S623 that the value of the BR successive continuation flag is not "1" (when S623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuous lottery processing (S625). In the BR continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR based on the BR1 continuous lottery table (see FIG. 57) or the BR2 continuous lottery table (see FIG. 58).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR by the process of S625 is determined (S626). In S626, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not determined to continue BR (when S626 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation process and also performs the ART processing (FIGS. 105 and 105). 106) also ends.

  On the other hand, if S626 is YES, or after the process of S624, the sub CPU 102 performs a BR continuation determination process (S627). Details of the BR continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S627, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation process and also ends the ART process (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[BR continuation decision processing]
Next, the BR continuation determination time process performed in S627 in the BR continuation time process flowchart (see FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition lottery processing during BR (S641). This additional extra lottery process during BR shows a specific example of the additional extra effect determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the additional addition lottery processing during BR, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of additional addition based on the additional addition lottery table during BR (see FIG. 59). Then, an additional addition flag (“addition addition A flag”, “addition addition B flag”, “addition addition C1 flag”, “addition addition C2 flag”, or “addition addition C3 flag”) corresponding to the determined additional addition contents is displayed. Turn on.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag (S642). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BR lottery continuous lottery process (S643). In the BR successive continuation lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue the BR successive continuations based on the BR successive continuation lottery table (not shown). If it is decided to “continue” the next BR, “1” is stored in the BR continuous storage area. In addition, when the value of the BR continuous storage area is “2”, the BR continuous continuous lottery process is not performed. Subsequent to the processing of S643, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation determination processing and also ends the BR continuation processing (see FIG. 107).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the normal mid-process performed in S545 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ is in progress (S661). During CZ, the CZ flag is on, and the CZ precursor flag is off. In S661, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the CZ is not in progress (when S661 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a mode lottery process (S662).

  In the present embodiment, in the general state, a plurality of modes having different CZ winning rates and pseudo bonus winning rates are provided. In the mode lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines a mode based on a mode lottery table (not shown) and shifts to the determined mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ entry lottery processing (S663). In the CZ entry lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is won based on a CZ entry lottery table (not shown). When the winning of CZ is determined, the sub CPU 102 turns on the CZ flag and the CZ precursor flag corresponding to the determined CZ. Further, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of precursor games based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and stores the determined number of precursor games in the precursor game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs bonus lottery processing based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) (S664). When the winning of the pseudo bonus is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the type of the pseudo bonus (“SBB”, “BB” or “RB”) based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). To do. Then, the sub CPU 102 turns on a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and a precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) corresponding to the determined pseudo bonus. . Furthermore, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of precursor games based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and stores the determined number of precursor games in the precursor game number counter. After the process of S664, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal process and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  Here, returning to S661 again, when it is determined in S661 that the sub CPU 102 is in CZ (when S661 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in addition lottery process during CZ (S665). This CZ mid cut-in addition lottery process shows a specific example of a notification number addition lottery means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the CZ cut-in addition lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to add “1” to the specified number of times based on the CZ cut-in addition lottery table (see FIG. 51). If it is determined to add “1” to the specified number of times, the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the CI number counter in CZ. In addition, as the cut-in addition lottery process during CZ according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it may be determined whether or not to add “2” or more to the specified number of times.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won (S666). When determining in S666 that the sub CPU 102 has won the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) (when S666 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that “reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the black BAR)”. Is set (S667).

  When the winning number “4” (abbreviated as “F_C_BAR1”) is won, the stop order is “right middle left” or “right middle left”, and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR) On the condition, the combination of symbols related to “C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E” is stopped and displayed. That is, when the winning number “4” is won and the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left”, “black BAR” − “black BAR” corresponding to “C_BAR_A” depending on the timing of the stop operation. "-" Black BAR "symbol combination may be stopped on the active line. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won, “reverse push navigation (navigating to the black BAR)” is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) is won during CZ, the winning of the pseudo bonus is determined. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with “reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the black BAR)” and the symbol combination “black BAR”-“black BAR”-“black BAR” is stopped and displayed on the active line. The player can recognize that the pseudo bonus has been won.

  After the process of S667, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus winning process (S668). This bonus winning time process shows a specific example of the advantageous state determination means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the bonus winning process, the sub CPU 102 determines the type of pseudo bonus (“SBB”, “BB”, or “RB”) based on a bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the sub CPU 102 determines a flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) corresponding to the determined pseudo bonus and a preparation flag (“SBB preparation flag”, “BB preparation flag” or “ RB ready flag ") is turned on.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end time processing (S669). In the CZ end process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the CZ flag, and clears the values of the CZ game number counter and the CZ in-count CI counter. After the process of S669, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  Here, returning to S666 again, when it is determined in S666 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the winning number “4” (abbreviation “F_C_BAR1”) (when S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 “1” is added to the game number counter (S670).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in occurrence lottery process during CZ (S671). This CZ cut-in generation lottery process shows a specific example of the notification generation lottery means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the CZ cut-in occurrence lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to generate cut-in (“reverse-pushing navigation (navigating the black BAR)”) based on the CZ cut-in occurrence lottery table (see FIG. 52). To decide.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the occurrence of cut-in has been won (S672). In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the occurrence of cut-in has not been won (when S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal mid-process, and the process is performed when the start command is received ( The process proceeds to S546 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the occurrence of cut-in has been won in S672 (when S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “reverse push navigation (black BAR aiming navigation)”. (S673).

  In the present embodiment, when “losing” is determined by the internal lottery process, in S671, whether or not to generate a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (aiming at the black BAR)”) is determined. Therefore, even if it is determined in S671 that the cut-in is to be generated and the stop operation is performed in accordance with “reverse-push navigation (navigating black BAR)”, “black BAR” − “black BAR” − “black BAR”. The combination of symbols is not stopped.

  In the stop table selected at the time of “losing” in the present embodiment, when the stop order is “middle right” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR), a right display is displayed. The number of sliding pieces capable of stopping the “black BAR” is set in the window 4R and the middle display window 4C. Thereby, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the combination of symbols “black BAR”-“black BAR”-“black BAR” is stopped and displayed until the second stop.

  After the processing of S673, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the CI number counter in CZ (S674). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the CI number counter in CZ is “0” (S675). In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter in CZ is not “0” (NO in S675), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S675 that the value of the CZ CI counter is “0” (S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S676). Details of the causal value related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end time processing (S677). After the process of S677, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal process, and moves the process to S546 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Causal value related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the causal value related process performed in S676 in the normal process flowchart (see FIG. 109) and in S723 in the later-described preparation process flowchart (see FIG. 111) will be described. To do. In addition, the causal value related process of this embodiment is performed at various timings corresponding to various conditions referring to various causal value lottery tables.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value accumulation lottery process (S701). In the causal value accumulation lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines a causal value based on various causal value accumulation lottery tables (see FIGS. 64 to 72), and adds the determined causal value to the causal value counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed “100” (when S702 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing and performs normal processing ( The process proceeds to S677 in FIG. 109) or S724 in a preparatory process (see FIG. 111 described later).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S702 that the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (when S702 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the causal value stock counter (S703). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “100” from the value of the causal value counter (S704). Then, after the processing of S704, the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing, and shifts the processing to S677 of normal processing (see FIG. 109) or S724 of preparation processing described later (see FIG. 111 described later). .

[Processing in preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, a description will be given of the preparation process performed in S546 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not preparation is in progress (S721). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S721 that it is not in preparation (if S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the preparation process and proceeds to S547 in the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S721 that the sub CPU 102 is preparing (when S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the preparing digested G number counter (S722). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the causal value related process described with reference to FIG. 110 (S723).

  After the process of S723, the sub CPU 102 refers to the operation condition table (see FIG. 76) and determines whether or not the operation condition is satisfied (S724). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S724 that the operating condition is not satisfied (in the case where S724 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process in preparation and executes the process at the time of start command reception (see FIG. 103). Move on to S547.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S724 that the operation condition is satisfied (when S724 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding preparation flag and sets the value of the preparation digestion G number counter. Clear (S725). After the process of S725, the sub CPU 102 ends the process in preparation, and moves the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Precursor check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the precursor check process performed in S547 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the warning is in progress (S741). In the case of a precursor, the value of the precursor game number counter is “1” or more. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S741 that the warning is not in progress (when S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the warning check process and proceeds to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S741 that the sub CPU 102 is a precursor (when S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter (S742). However, when the preparation flag is ON, the value of the precursor game number counter is not subtracted by “1”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter has become “0” (S743). In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (when S743 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and receives the start command. The process proceeds to S548 of the time process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S743 that the value of the precursor game number counter has become “0” (when S743 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the CZ start time ( S744). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”) to determine whether or not it is the CZ start time.

  In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a CZ start time (when S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ start time process (S745). This CZ start time process shows a specific example of specific game start means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

  In the CZ start time process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag, and sets an initial value corresponding to the type of the CZ flag in the CI number counter in CZ. In the present embodiment, the initial value when the CZ1 flag is on is “4”, and the initial value when the CZ2 flag is on is “10”. After the process of S745, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S744 that the sub CPU 102 is not at the start of CZ (when S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a pseudo bonus start time (S746). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a bonus start time with reference to a precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) related to the pseudo bonus.

  In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a pseudo bonus start time (when S746 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus start time process (S747). In the bonus start time process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag, and starts the bonus according to the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag”, or “RB flag”) related to the pseudo bonus that is turned on. Process.

  When the SBB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the SBB preparation flag, and when the BB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB preparation flag. When the RB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the RB preparation flag. After the process of S747, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S746 that the sub CPU 102 is not at the time of starting the bonus (when S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time of starting ART (second ART) (S748). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART (second ART) is started with reference to the ART precursor flag.

  In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is started (when S748 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an ART start process (S749). In the ART start process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag and turns on the ART preparation flag. However, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the ART ready flag is not turned on. Further, in the ART start process, the sub CPU 102 sets “50” in the ART game number counter. After the process of S749, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is not started in S748 (when S748 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the BR start time (S750). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the BR start time with reference to the BR precursor flag.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is not at the start of BR (when S750 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and executes the process at the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) S548. Move to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S750 that the sub CPU 102 is at the start of BR (when S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR precursor flag (S751). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing described with reference to FIG. 107 (S752). After the process of S752, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and moves the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Direction lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the effect lottery process performed in S548 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect number lottery process (S761). In the effect number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to an effect number lottery table (not shown) and determines an effect number based on various parameters stored in the sub storage area. Then, the determined production number is stored in the sub storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (S762). In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is not the development effect (failure) (when S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also starts the start command. The reception process (see FIG. 103) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, in S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is the development effect (failure) (when S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs provisional causal value lottery processing ( S763). This provisional causal value lottery process shows a specific example of provisional causal value determination means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the temporary causal value lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the temporary causal value lottery table (see FIG. 73) and determines the temporary causal value based on the type of development effect. Then, the determined provisional causal value is stored in the sub storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value determination process (S764). This causal value determination process shows a specific example of the causal value determination means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the causal value determination process, the sub CPU 102 corrects the determined provisional causal value to the maximum value within the range of the internal points, and determines it as a causal value. Then, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined causal value to the value of the causal value counter. Further, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the same value as the determined causal value from the value of the internal point counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (S765). In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed “100” (when S765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and the start command reception process. (See FIG. 103) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S765 that the value of the causal value counter has exceeded “100” (when S765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the causal value stock ( S766).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “100” from the value of the causal value counter (S767). After the process of S767, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

[Reel stop command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the reel stop command reception process performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (S781). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S781 that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” (when S781 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and produces the process. The process proceeds to S526 in the content determination process (see FIG. 102).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S781 that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (when S781 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional added B flag is on. Is discriminated (S782). In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional extra B flag is not on (in the case where S782 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process, and the process is determined as an effect content determination process (FIG. 102).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S782 that the additional extra B flag is ON (when S782 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an extra extra B extra G number lottery process (S783). In the additional extra B extra G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the extra game number based on the additional extra B extra G number lottery table (see FIG. 62), and adds the decided extra game number to the extra game number counter. To do.

  In addition addition B addition G number lottery processing, the number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is referred to. The number of added games determined by the previous stop operation is acquired with reference to the added game number counter.

  After the processing of S783, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a third stop operation (S784). When the sub CPU 102 determines in step S784 that the operation is not the third stop operation (NO in step S784), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process, and performs the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102). ) To S526.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S784 that the sub CPU 102 is the third stop operation (when S784 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of finishing the additional addition B (S785). In the process at the time of completion of the additional addition B, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition B flag. Further, the value of the added game number counter is added to the ART game number counter, and the value of the added game number counter is cleared. After the process of S785, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process, and moves the process to S526 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102).

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the process at the time of no operation command reception performed by S536 in the flowchart (refer FIG. 102) of an effect content determination process is demonstrated.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (S801). In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” (when S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and the contents of the effects. The determination process (see FIG. 102) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” in S801 (when S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional added C flag is on. Is determined (S802). In S802, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional extra C flag is not on (in the case of NO determination in S802), the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (FIG. 102). See also).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S802 that the additional additional C flag is on (in the case where S802 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S803). ). That the inserted number is a game start possible number means that the start operation can be accepted.

  In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (FIG. 102) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S803 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BET switch 62 is on (S804). ). The BET switch 62 performs on-edge detection when the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is pressed.

  In S804, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 62 is not on (in the case of NO determination in S804), the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in step S804 that the BET switch 62 is on (in the case of YES determination in step S804), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C addition G number lottery processing (S805). The additional addition C addition G number lottery processing of S805 shows a specific example of the additional addition lottery according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

  In the additional addition C addition G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional addition C addition G number lottery table. Then, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined added game number to the value of the added game number counter. In addition, in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process, when the number of additional games of “1” or more is determined, “continuation” of the additional addition C is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not “continuation” is determined in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S806). When the sub CPU 102 determines that “continuation” has been determined in S806 (in the case of YES determination in S806), the sub CPU 102 terminates the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102). Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in step S806 that “continuation” has not been determined (NO in step S806), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition C termination process (S807). In the process at the time of completion of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition C flag (“addition addition C1 flag”, “addition addition C2 flag”, or “addition addition C3 flag”). Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the added game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 clears the value of the added game number counter. Then, after the process of S807, the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102).

[Various effects using the touch input unit]
Next, various effects performed using the touch input unit 31a will be described with reference to the drawings.

(1) Notification effect of added game number First, the notification effect of the added game number of ART (the number of additions of the number of games in the assist state) using the touch input unit 31a will be described with reference to FIGS. 116A to 116C. FIG. 116A to FIG. 116C are diagrams showing a state of a notification effect of the number of added games using the touch input unit 31a.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of additional games for ART is determined in the BB extra G lottery process (S565 in FIG. 104), the number of additional games determined by the effect using the touch input unit 31a is notified. Hereinafter, in the display unit (display screen) 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, an area located above the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is referred to as a main screen 111, and an area provided with the touch panel input unit 31a is referred to as a sub screen 112. Call it.

  In the lottery process for adding the G number in BB, when the number of additional games is determined, the characters “scratch” are displayed on the sub-screen 112 as shown in FIG. 116A. In addition, a circular “fill” is displayed under the word “scratch” on the sub-screen 112. The color of the “fill” can be set as appropriate, but can be set to silver, for example. This makes it possible to make “fill” look like silver scratch printing used for a lotus or the like.

  Next, when the player rubs the “filled” area with his / her finger, as shown in FIG. 116B, the sub-screen 112 disappears the portion rubbed with the “filled” finger, and characters, numbers , Display such that a part of an image such as a figure or a design can be seen. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that a silver scratch used for a lottery or the like is being scraped off and to enhance the interest of the production.

  When the portion where “painting” disappears becomes larger, as shown in FIG. 116C, the entire number indicating the number of added games can be seen. Thereby, the player can recognize the determined number of additional games (for example, “+50”). In the present embodiment, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the circular “paint” is displayed on the sub-screen 112, a number indicating the number of added games is displayed on the main screen 111.

  In order to execute such an effect, when the number of additional games is determined, first, the sub control circuit 101 displays the above-mentioned “painting” on the sub screen 112. Next, when touch input information is output from the portion of the touch sensor module 31 that overlaps the area where “fill” is displayed, the sub-control circuit 101 is rubbed with a “fill” finger based on the touch input information. Erase the part. Then, the sub-control circuit 101 executes a display on the sub-screen 112 so that an image showing the number of added games can be seen from the erased portion.

  As a gaming machine of the present invention, when a predetermined time elapses after the circular “fill” is displayed on the sub-screen 112, the “fill” is completely erased and the number indicating the number of games added to the sub-screen 112 is displayed. You may make it display the whole.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a notification effect is displayed in which the number of games is displayed on the sub screen 112 when “painting” disappears. However, as a notification effect using the touch panel input unit 31a included in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the “paint” displayed on the sub-screen 112 disappears, various information to be notified to the player is displayed. Also good. Examples of the various types of information to be notified to the player include, for example, the above-described information for informing that “the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined” and the type of small role determined as an internal winning combination (for example, , “Bell” or “replay”).

  Note that the above-described notification effect of the number of added games using the touch panel input unit 31a is from after the extra lottery process (after the start lever operation) until the sub CPU 102 receives a display command (until the third stop of the reel). Can be performed at any timing. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the number of added games determined in the G number addition lottery process (S565 in FIG. 104) in BB is notified by the effect of eliminating the above-mentioned “painting”. It is not limited. For example, when the addition of the ART game number is determined in various extra lottery processes during the ART process (see FIG. 105), the number of added games is reduced by the effect of eliminating the “painting” as in the present embodiment. You may perform the effect to alert | report.

(2) Selection effect of the number of added games The pachislot 1 of this embodiment is not only a notification effect of the above-mentioned number of added games (number of times of addition of games in the assist state) as an effect using the touch panel input unit 31a. Also provided is an effect function that allows the player to select the number of additional games by a predetermined operation on the touch panel input unit 31a (sub-screen 112) of the player. Note that the operation of selecting the additional game number of ART using the touch panel input unit 31a is also controlled by the sub CPU 201 in the same manner as the above-described notification effect of the additional game number of ART.

  First, an outline of the selection effect of the additional number of games in the ART in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when the selection effect of the number of additional games for ART is started, a question of a predetermined size (initial size) is displayed on the sub screen 112 of the touch panel input unit 31a. In this embodiment, the initial size of the question is set to such a size that the player cannot clearly determine (view) the question content.

  Next, the player touches the question displayed on the sub-screen 112 (touch panel input unit 31a), performs a predetermined zoom operation, and enlarges and displays the question. Then, the player confirms the contents of the enlarged question and gives an answer. At this time, the zoom magnification (enlarged display magnification) of the question can be arbitrarily determined by the player. The answer to the question is executed by a predetermined operation such as a player's touch operation on a predetermined answer option displayed on the sub screen 112, for example.

  If the answer is correct, the player is given the number of extra games corresponding to the zoom magnification from the initial size of the question at the time of answering. In this embodiment, the correspondence between the zoom magnification of the question (including the zoom magnification of 0%) and the number of added games is such that the smaller the zoom magnification from the initial size of the question at the time of answer is, the larger the number of added games is. It is set in advance.

  In this embodiment, the player's operation during the selection effect of the number of added games is valid only for the zoom operation to the question and the touch operation to the answer option, and other operations such as a slide operation, a wide operation, etc. Etc. are invalid. Therefore, in the selection effect of the added number of games in this embodiment, for example, the display size of the question cannot be returned to the display size before the enlarged display (the zoom magnification is returned to the zoom magnification before the zoom operation) by the wide operation.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 117A and 117B and FIGS. 118A to 118C, an example of the selection effect of the additional number of games performed in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment will be described. 117A and 117B, and FIGS. 118A to 118C are diagrams showing a schematic configuration in the vicinity of the touch panel input unit 31a and a state of selection effects of the number of additional games in the present embodiment.

  117A and 117B, and FIGS. 118A to 118C exemplify an example in which a visual acuity test is adopted as a question to be asked in the selection effect of the number of added games. Therefore, in this example, a question that causes the player to answer the opening direction of the ring used in the visual acuity test is displayed on the sub screen 112 of the touch panel input unit 31a.

  When the selection effect of the number of games added to the ART is started, first, as shown in FIG. 117A, a question display screen 201 (initial answer screen) is displayed on the sub screen 112 and a question display screen 201 (predetermined area). A ring with a predetermined initial size is displayed as a question 202 at the approximate center. At this time, the question 202 is displayed with an initial size such that the player cannot clearly determine (view) the opening direction (question content) of the ring.

  At this time, in the vicinity of the outer side of the question display screen 201, along the outer peripheral direction, a touch area 203 of a plurality of types of answer options ("up", "down", "left", " "Right", "Upper left", "Lower left", "Upper right" and "Lower right" areas) are displayed. It should be noted that the touch area 203 for each answer option is arranged on the question display screen 201 at a position where it is difficult for the player's finger to touch when the player performs a zoom operation on the question 202 described later. Furthermore, the touch area 203 for each answer option is arranged on the question display screen 201 at a position substantially corresponding to the opening direction of the ring. For example, the touch area 203 for the answer option “upper” is arranged in the center near the upper side of the question display screen 201, and the touch area 203 for the answer option “upper left” is arranged near the upper left corner of the question display screen 201. . In addition, the arrangement | positioning form of multiple types of answer choices is not limited to the example shown to FIG. 117A, It can set arbitrarily.

  Further, on the question display screen 201, a word (FIG. 117A in FIG. 117A) that prompts the player to perform a zoom operation (enlargement display operation) of the question 202 (ring) or an answer operation of the question 202 (touch operation to answer options). "Zoom or answer!") Is also displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 117A, this word is displayed at the bottom of the question 202, but is displayed at an arbitrary position as long as it is in the question display screen 201 and does not overlap the question 202 and the answer options. be able to.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117B, the player performs a pinch-out operation (a white arrow in FIG. 117B) with a predetermined spread amount by bringing a finger into contact with the vicinity of the question 202 in the question display screen 201. As a result, the player's pinch-out operation (zoom operation) is detected by the touch sensor module 31, and touch input information (zoom operation information) corresponding to the zoom operation is output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub CPU 201.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times that the player can perform the zoom operation is not limited to one, and the zoom operation can be performed as long as the player selects an answer from the start of the selection effect of the added game number. Can be repeated multiple times. However, in this embodiment, there is no upper limit on the number of times that the zoom operation can be performed, but there is an upper limit on the display size of the question 202 (ring), and the maximum ring that fits the entire ring in the question display screen 201 is provided. Is the upper limit display size of the question 202. In the present embodiment, an upper limit of the number of times the zoom operation can be performed may be provided.

  Next, the sub CPU 102, based on the zoom operation information input from the touch sensor module 31, places a visual acuity test ring as the question 202 at the approximate center in the question display screen 201 as shown in FIG. 118A. The image is enlarged and displayed at a zoom magnification corresponding to the zoom operation information. With this enlarged display, in the example shown in FIG. 118A, the player can recognize that the question 202 is an annular ring whose opening direction is downward.

  Next, when the player looks at the enlarged question 202 (ring) and touches the touch area 203 of a predetermined answer option with a finger from the touch area 203 of a plurality of answer options, as shown in FIG. 118B. When an answer operation is performed, touch input information (answer information) corresponding to the answer operation is output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub CPU 201.

  In the present embodiment, the player's answering operation timing, that is, the zoom magnification from the initial size of the question 202 at the time of answering can be arbitrarily selected by the player. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 118A, the player may answer when the ring is enlarged and displayed to a size where the opening direction of the ring (the correct answer of question 202) can be clearly understood. May be answered in a state where the display size is such that the player cannot clearly determine the opening direction.

  In the latter case, for example, the player may make an answer on the initial answer screen shown in FIG. 117A. In this case, the selection effect of the added game number is completed without performing the zoom operation. However, when the answer to the question 202 is correct, the added game number corresponding to the zoom magnification of 0% is acquired. That is, in this case, it is possible to acquire the largest number of additional games among a plurality of types of additional games that can be acquired in the selection effect of the number of additional games being executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the correct / incorrect answer based on the answer information input from the touch sensor module 31. If the answer is correct, the zoom magnification of the question 202 at the time of answering is referred to, and the initial size of the question 202 is displayed at the approximate center in the question display screen 201 as shown in FIG. 118C. The number of extra games corresponding to the zoom magnification is displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 118B and FIG. 118C, when the player touches and selects the touch area 203 of the answer option “below” from a plurality of answer options, the answer is correct, so the question display In the approximate center in the screen 201, “+30” game is displayed as the number of additional games corresponding to the zoom magnification of the question 202 at the time of answering. At this time, after the number of added games is acquired (selected), the sub CPU 102 displays the acquired number of added games (“+30”) on the main screen 111.

  On the other hand, if the answer is incorrect, information (words etc.) indicating “incorrect” is displayed in the question display screen 201 (not shown). At this time, the number of added games may be “0”, or a preset minimum guaranteed number of additional games (for example, “5” game) may be given to the player. In the latter case, the sub CPU 102 displays the acquired minimum guaranteed additional number of games on the main screen 111.

  In the present embodiment, the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART is performed as described above. It should be noted that the determination lottery process (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform the selection effect on the number of games added to the ART is performed when the start lever is operated (at the start operation), and the content of the effect is also determined in this determination lottery process. The In addition, the above-described selection effect of the number of added games is an arbitrary timing after the selection effect determination lottery process (after the start lever operation) until the sub CPU 102 receives a display command (until the third stop of the reel). Can be done.

  The execution (addition confirmation) of adding the number of added games selected (acquired) by the selection effect of the added game to the number of currently remaining ART games (addition confirmation) is performed when the sub CPU 102 receives a display command (reel At the third stop). Therefore, the data of the number of added games selected (acquired) by the above-described additional game selection effect is held (stored) in the sub-RAM 103 until the display command is received.

  In the present embodiment, only one of the above-mentioned ART addition game selection effects and the ART addition game notification effects described with reference to FIGS. 116A to 116C may win, or both may be won. Any configuration may be used. Moreover, the selection effect of the number of added games in the present embodiment can be applied not only when the number of added games is determined during BB but also when the number of added games is determined during ART.

  Also, in the selection effect of the number of added games in the present embodiment, the question 202 is displayed on the initial response screen (FIG. 117A) or the answer screen in the middle of the selection effect (FIGS. 118A and 118B) until a predetermined time elapses. In addition, when the player does not perform the zoom operation or the answer operation (touch operation) on the question 202, the selection effect of the added game number may be automatically ended. In this configuration, if the player does not execute the zoom operation or the answer operation for a predetermined time on the answer screen, the number of added games may be set to “0” as in the case of an incorrect answer, or set in advance. The added minimum guaranteed number of games (for example, “5” game or the like) may be given to the player. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is configured to wait for the progress of the game until the player performs a zoom operation or an answer operation on the question 202 on the answer screen during the selection effect of the added number of games. Also good.

  Further, in the selection effect of the number of added games in this embodiment, only one type of correspondence relationship between the zoom magnification (including the zoom magnification of 0%) of the question 202 and the number of added games to be given is provided. Alternatively, a plurality of types may be provided. In the latter case, for example, the correspondence between the zoom magnification of the question 202 and the number of added games is determined by lottery. The determination process of the correspondence between the zoom magnification of the question 202 and the number of added games is performed in the determination lottery process (not shown) for selecting the added game number effect when the start lever is operated (at the start operation).

  As described above, in the selection effect of the number of additional games of ART in the present embodiment, the player gradually enlarges and discriminates the content of the question 202 by a zoom operation, and determines the question 202 at an arbitrary timing. You can answer (select the number of extra games). Therefore, in the selection effect of the additional number of games according to the present embodiment, a strategy for the selection operation (the zoom operation and the answer operation for the question 202) of the player's additional game occurs, and the player makes a conscious selection. Can be made. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to further increase the playability of the selection effect of the number of added games.

  Note that the sub-control circuit 101 controls the above-described various processes for selecting the additional game number for the ART and adding the selected additional game number. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 displays the question 202 on the sub-screen 112 (question display screen 201) of the touch panel input unit 31a, and enlarges the question 202 according to the player's zoom operation. (Question display means), means for determining whether or not the answer to question 202 is correct (answer determination means), and addition of ART corresponding to the zoom magnification of question 202 when the answer is correct It also serves as means for adding the number of games to the number of remaining games of ART at the time of answering (game number adding means).

  Next, various modified examples of the above-described selection effect of the number of added games in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the above-described selection effect of the number of added games in the present embodiment, the initial size of the question 202 displayed on the initial answer screen (question display screen 201 in FIG. 117A) is such that the player cannot determine (view) the question content. Although the example of the size has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial size of the question 202 displayed on the initial answer screen may be changed according to the gaming state or the internal winning combination. For example, the initial size of the question 202 may be set to a size that allows the player to discriminate (view) the content of the question to some extent according to the gaming state, the internal winning combination, and the like. In other words, a configuration may be provided in which the number of additional games corresponding to a zoom magnification of 0% can be easily acquired according to the gaming state, the internal winning combination, and the like.

  Further, in the selection effect of the number of added games in the present embodiment, the initial size of the question 202 displayed on the initial answer screen (question display screen 201 in FIG. 117A) is made constant, and the number of added games corresponding to the initial size is, for example, , It may be changed according to the gaming state or the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the above-described selection effect of the number of added games in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of answer options for the question 202 are displayed on the sub-screen 112 (question display screen 201) of the touch panel input unit 31a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of answer options for the question 202 may be displayed on the main screen 111. In this case, the player operates various operation buttons provided on the front door 2b to select a predetermined answer option from a plurality of kinds of answer options displayed on the main screen 111.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned selection game for the number of added games in the present embodiment, an example in which a question for identifying the opening direction of the ring for eyesight inspection is adopted as the question 202, that is, in the selection effect for the number of added games, However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, as the question 202, a question for identifying a character, a number, a figure, or the like may be adopted. That is, in the selection effect of the added game number, the player may select (determine) the added game number of the ART by performing, for example, a character guessing game or the like. Also in this case, as in the above embodiment, the zoom magnification (including the zoom magnification of 0%) of the question 202 is such that the smaller the zoom magnification from the initial size of the question 202 at the time of answering, the larger the number of additional games. And the number of added games are set in advance.

  In addition, in the selection effect of the number of extra games accompanied by the player's zoom operation, such as the above-described eyesight inspection game and character guessing game, as described in the above embodiment, a pinch-out operation can be used as the zoom operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the player can perform a predetermined operation while touching the sub-screen 112, the zoom can be arbitrarily zoomed as long as the question 202 (ring for examination, letters, numbers, figures, etc.) can be enlarged and displayed. It can be used instead of the pinch out operation. For example, a zoom operation that enlarges and displays the question 202 based on the duration of the player's touch operation may be used instead of the pinch-out operation.

  Furthermore, in the selection effect of the number of added games that employs the above-described eyesight inspection game, character guessing game, or the like, the configuration may be such that the player's zoom operation is not required. For example, the configuration may be such that the question 202 is automatically enlarged and displayed with the passage of time after starting the selection effect of the number of added games. In this case, after starting the selection effect of the added game number, the question 202 may be continuously enlarged and displayed with time, or the question 202 may be enlarged and displayed step by step at predetermined time intervals. .

  In addition, as a player's answer form in the selection effect of the number of additional games in which the question 202 is automatically enlarged and displayed, for example, the player performs a predetermined operation such as a touch operation on the sub-screen 112 to answer the question 202. It is possible to adopt a form in which the enlarged display operation of the question 202 is stopped and then the answer to the enlarged question 202 is answered, or the player can answer the question 202 without stopping the enlarged display operation of the question 202. May be adopted.

  In addition, in the selection effect of the number of added games in the present embodiment, an effect (game) form in which the player responds by enlarging the question 202 by a zoom operation has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, on the initial answer screen (question display screen 201 in FIG. 117A), in order to make the question 202 difficult to see, all or part of the question 202 (for example, a ring) is covered and displayed with another image (filled image). Thereafter, the player may be able to grasp the contents of the question 202 while rubbing the area of the filled image with a finger in the manner of scratching (performing a scratch operation). That is, in the selection effect of the added game number, the player may play a scratch game and select (determine) the added game number of ART.

  In this case, the number of added games is determined according to the total amount of filled images erased by the player's scratch operation by the time of answering, and the smaller the total amount of painted images erased by the player's scratch operation, the more In order to increase the number of games, the correspondence between the total amount of filled images (including the case where the total amount is 0) erased by the scratch operation and the number of added games is set in advance.

  In addition, as the question 202, for example, a question display screen 201 shown in FIG. 117A is used, in which two images having substantially the same contents are displayed, and a question for allowing a player to find a different place between the two images is adopted. Also good. That is, in the selection effect of the number of added games, an error finding game may be performed to determine the number of additional games for ART.

  In the selection effect of the number of added games adopting the mistake search game, for example, when a different place between two images is set as one place, from the start of the production until the player touches (correctly answers) the different place. The extra game may be determined according to the elapsed time. In this case, the correspondence relationship between the elapsed time until the correct answer and the number of added games is set in advance such that the shorter the elapsed time until the correct answer, the larger the number of added games.

  In addition, in the selection effect of the number of games to be added using the mistake search game, for example, when a plurality of different locations are provided between two images, an error location that can be correctly answered within a predetermined time (time limit) from the start of the effect. An additional game may be determined according to the number of games. In this case, a correspondence relationship between the number of correct answer points and the number of added games is set in advance so that the greater the number of correct answer points, the greater the number of added games.

[Examples of using the mobile device linkage function]
Next, usage examples of the portable terminal cooperation function of the pachislot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 133.

  The portable terminal cooperation function of the pachi-slot 1 is a function that links the pachi-slot 1 and the portable terminal. When using the mobile terminal linkage function of the pachislot 1, it is possible to record detailed information about the game played by the player, or to customize the function that does not affect the game result of the pachislot 1 by satisfying a predetermined condition Can do.

  As the predetermined condition, for example, a specific small combination (internal winning combination) is continuously determined, or a specific effect is executed. In addition, for example, to customize a function that does not affect the game result of the pachislot 1, for example, music output during the first ART (pseudo bonus) or the second ART (ART) can be changed to a special song. For example, changing the character's costume displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 may be used.

  When using the portable terminal cooperation function, first, a guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 by the player's operation. Specifically, when the player performs a pressing operation on the “ENTER” button (not shown) or the “SELECT” button in the state where the unit game is finished, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. The Also, as shown in FIG. 119, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 even when the player touches the unimemo button displayed on the sub screen 112 in the state where the unit game is over.

  The “unit game has ended” basically means that after the player's stop operation, the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped and displayed, and then the player inserts a game medium (medal). It is a period until it is performed. If there is a payout of game media (medals) when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped and displayed, a period from when the payout is completed until the player performs a game media input operation. Becomes “a state where the unit game is finished”. In addition, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped and displayed, when the display combination (replay) is related to replaying, the start lever 16 is tilted after the game medium is automatically inserted. The period becomes “a state in which the unit game has ended”. Further, if there is a game stop period (such as a production lock) after the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped and displayed, the player performs an operation to insert a game medium after the game stop period ends. The period until the start lever 16 is tilted, or the period until the start lever 16 is tilted is “a state in which the unit game is completed”. Note that the period until the start lever 16 is tilted even if the player performs an operation to insert a game medium may be “a state in which the unit game has ended”.

  FIG. 120 shows a state where the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. The initial guide image includes characters “Unimemo (registered trademark)” and characters “Please select your favorite menu”. “Unimemo” is a specific example of a name representing the mobile terminal cooperation function.

  As shown in FIG. 120, when a guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, a guide menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the guide menu include “Start Unimemo”, “Arrangement / Payout”, “Model Site”, and “Return to Game”.

  When the player touches “Start Unimemo” on the guide menu, a Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 121 described later). When the player touches “arrangement / payout”, an initial arrangement / payout image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 132 described later). When the player touches “model site”, a model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 133 described later).

  When the player touches “Return to game”, the display of the guide initial image on the main screen 111 and the display of the guide menu on the sub screen 112 are finished. On the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112, an effect video displayed when playing a game and an initial video displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period are displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without touching any of the items in the guide menu, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 have a video for presentation and a pachislot 1 that are displayed when playing a game. An initial image to be displayed when no operation is performed for a period is displayed.

  If the guide menu is displayed while the development effect (continuous effect) or the like is being executed, the development effect (continuous effect) by the liquid crystal display device 11 is resumed after the display of the guide menu is terminated. You may let them. Further, when the guide menu is displayed in the middle of the production, the production may be displayed from the beginning after the display of the guide menu.

  FIG. 121 shows a state where the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. The unimemo initial image includes characters “Unimemo” and characters “Let's customize a favorite character”.

  As shown in FIG. 121, when a unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, a unimemo menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112. The items in the uni-memo menu include “password entry”, “record”, “record and exit”, “member registration”, “return to game”, and “return”.

  When the player touches “password input” in the unimemo menu, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 122 described later).

  If the player touches “Record” in the unimemo menu in a state where the password has been successfully entered, a recording registration code is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 126 described later). When the registration code for recording is read by the portable terminal, the URL of the website for recording the data relating to the game played from the start of the unimemo to the present (recording the data without ending the memo) is acquired.

  Hereinafter, the data relating to the game played by the player is referred to as “play data”. The play data can include, for example, the number of games, the number of payouts, the number of wins for a small role, the name of the developed development effect, and the like.

  If the player touches “Record and finish” in the unimemo menu while the password has been successfully input, a play data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 128 described later).

  In addition, when the player touches “Record” or “Record and end” in the unimemo menu in a state where the password is not entered (failed), the password entry confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. Is displayed (see FIG. 127 described later).

  When the player touches “member registration” in the unimemo menu, a member registration code is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 131 described later). When the membership registration code is read by the portable terminal, the URL of the website for membership registration is acquired. In the present embodiment, when a member is registered, a password necessary for starting a memo (mobile terminal cooperation function) can be acquired.

  An expiration date (for example, one day) may be set for “password”. Further, it may be set so as to invalidate a password used once when performing uni-memo. In this case, it is necessary to obtain a password on the web every time the memo is performed.

  When “Return to game” in the unimemo menu is touched, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period of time. An image is displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without touching any of the items in the unimemo menu, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 have an effect video or pachislot 1 displayed when playing a game. An initial image to be displayed when no operation is performed for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, when “Return” in the unimemo menu is touched, a guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and a guide menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 120).

  FIG. 122 shows a state where a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111. The password display image includes a password input display area and characters "Please enter your password."

  As shown in FIG. 122, when a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, a password input menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the password input menu include “OK”, “Delete”, “0” to “9”, “A” to “F”, “Return to game”, and “Return”.

  When the player touches “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” in the password input menu of the password input menu, the touched numbers and characters are input and displayed in the password input display area. When the player touches “Determination” in the password input menu, a plurality of numbers and / or characters displayed in the password input display area are determined as passwords to be input. When the player touches “Delete” in the password input menu, the last input number or character is deleted from the password input display area.

  In the state where the uni-memo has already been started, the player enters “Determine”, “Delete”, “0” to “9”, and “A” to “F” in the password input menu displayed on the sub screen 112. When any of the touches is made, a data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 123 described later).

  If the input password is not correct, a password input failure notification image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 124 described later). On the other hand, if the input password is correct, a password input success notification image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 125 described later).

  When the player touches “Return to game” in the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. The initial video to be displayed is displayed. In addition, even when the player has not touched any of the password input menu items and a predetermined time has elapsed, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 also display on the main screen 111 and the video for presentation displayed when playing the game. An initial video to be displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches “Return” in the password input menu, the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and the unimemo menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

  FIG. 123 shows a state where the data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. The data clear confirmation image includes characters “Play data is cleared when password entry is completed. Are you sure?”. That is, when the input of the password is completed in the state where the uni-memo has already been started, the play data up to that point is cleared. Then, the play data from when the password input is completed is accumulated in the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 123, when a data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, a data clear confirmation menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the data clear confirmation menu include “decision”, “return to game”, and “return”.

  When the player touches “OK” in the data clear confirmation menu, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, and a password input menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 122). Thereby, the player can restart the input of a password.

  When the player touches “Return to game” in the data clear confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the display screen when playing the game or when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial video to be displayed is displayed. In addition, even when the player has not touched any of the items in the data clear confirmation menu and a predetermined time has elapsed, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect video displayed when playing the game. Alternatively, an initial video that is displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches “Return” in the data clear confirmation menu, the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and the unimemo menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

  FIG. 124 shows a state where a password input failure notification image is displayed on the main screen 111. The password input failure notification image notifies that the password input has failed.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the password input failure notification image includes characters “NG” and characters “Your password is wrong! Please input again!”. When the password input failure notification image is displayed on the main screen 111, a password input failure menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the password entry failure menu include “password entry”, “return to game”, and “return”.

  When the player touches “Password input” in the password entry failure menu, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, and a password input menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 122). Thereby, the player can redo the password input.

  When the player touches “Return to game” in the password entry failure menu, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 have not been operated for a predetermined period of time for the presentation video or pachislot 1 displayed when playing the game. The initial video to be displayed in the case is displayed. In addition, even when the player has not touched any of the items in the password entry failure and the predetermined time has elapsed, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed for the effect displayed when the game is played. A video or an initial video to be displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. When the player touches “Return” in the password entry failure menu, the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and the unimemo menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

  FIG. 125 shows a state in which a password input success notification image is displayed on the main screen 111. The password input success notification image notifies that the password has been successfully input.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the password input success notification image includes the characters “OK” and the characters “Password input confirmed!”. When the password is successfully input, the play data stored in the pachislot 1 is cleared. Then, the play data from the time when the password is successfully input is accumulated in the pachislot 1.

  When a password input success notification image is displayed on the main screen 111, a password input success menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the password entry success menu include “return to game” and “return”.

  When the player touches “Return to Game” in the menu when the password is successfully entered, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 have not been operated for a predetermined period of time for the presentation video or pachislot 1 displayed when playing the game. The initial video to be displayed in the case is displayed. In addition, even when the player has not touched any of the items in the password entry success menu and the predetermined time has elapsed, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display effects for displaying the game. A video or an initial video to be displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, when the player touches “Return” in the menu when the password is successfully input, the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and the unimemo menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

  FIG. 126 shows a state in which a recording registration code is displayed on the main screen 111. As shown in FIG. 126, below the registration code for recording on the main screen 111, characters “play data is recorded!” Are displayed.

  Note that even if play data is recorded halfway on a website obtained by reading a registration code for recording with a portable terminal, the previous play data is not cleared. The play data recorded on the way is accumulated in the pachislot slot 1 until the uni-memo is terminated or the password is input again.

  When the recording registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, a recording menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the menu at the time of recording include “return to game” and “return”.

  When the player touches “Return to game” in the recording menu, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial video to be displayed is displayed. Further, even when a predetermined time has passed without the player touching any of the menu items at the time of recording, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect video displayed when playing the game An initial video to be displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, when the player touches “Return” in the recording menu, the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and the unimemo menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

  FIG. 127 shows a state where a password input confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. In the password input confirmation image, notifying that the input of the password has not been successful and that the play data so far has not been accumulated is informed, and informing the user to input the password is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the password input confirmation image includes the characters “There is no play data! Please enter your password and log in to Unimemo”. In addition, below the password input confirmation image, a character such as “Press“ OK ”to move to the password input screen” is displayed.

  When the password input confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, a password input confirmation menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the password input confirmation menu include “OK”, “Return to game”, and “Return”.

  When the player touches “OK” in the password input confirmation menu, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, and a password input menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 122). Thereby, the player can input the password.

  When the player touches “Return to game” in the password input confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the display screen when playing a game or when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial video to be displayed is displayed. In addition, even when the player has not touched any of the password input confirmation menu items and a predetermined time has elapsed, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect video displayed when playing the game. Alternatively, an initial video that is displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, when the player touches “Return” in the password input confirmation menu, the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and the unimemo menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

  FIG. 128 shows a state in which a play data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. In the play data clear confirmation image, if “record and end” is performed, a notification that the play data is cleared is given.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the play data clear confirmation image includes the characters “Is it OK to clear the play data when the registration code is displayed”? When a play data clear confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, a play data clear confirmation menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items of the play data clear confirmation menu include “decision”, “return to game”, and “return”.

  When the player touches “OK” in the play data clear confirmation menu, a recording and end registration code is displayed (see FIG. 129 described later).

  When the player touches “Return to game” in the play data clear confirmation menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 have not been operated for a predetermined period of time for the presentation video or pachislot 1 displayed when playing the game. The initial video to be displayed in the case is displayed. In other words, the registration code for recording and ending is not displayed on the main screen 111. In addition, even when the player has not touched any of the items in the play data clear confirmation menu and a predetermined time has elapsed, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed for performing the game. A video or an initial video to be displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed.

  When the player touches “Return” in the password input confirmation menu, the pachislot 1 displays the unimemo initial image without displaying the recording and ending registration codes on the main screen 111. Then, a uni-memo menu is displayed on the sub screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

  FIG. 129 shows a state in which a recording and end registration code is displayed on the main screen 111. As shown in FIG. 129, below the recording and end registration code on the main screen 111, characters “Thank you for playing! Please record the play data” are displayed.

  When the player reads the registration code for recording and ending with the portable terminal, the URL of the website for recording the play data from the start of Unimemo to the present is acquired.

  When a recording and end registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, a recording and end menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the recording and exit menu include “return to game”. When the player touches “Return to game” in the recording and end menu, an end confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 130 described later).

  FIG. 130 shows a state in which an end confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111. The end confirmation image notifies the end of the unimemo.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the end confirmation image can no longer be accessed when the recording and end registration code and “End” are selected! ! Are you sure you're okay? ”. When an end confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, an end confirmation menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The item of the end confirmation menu includes “End”.

  When the player touches “End” in the end confirmation menu, the play data from the start of Unimemo to the present is cleared, and the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect video displayed when the game is played. Alternatively, an initial video that is displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. Even when the player has not touched “End” in the end confirmation menu and a predetermined time has elapsed, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 also display an effect video displayed when playing the game, An initial video to be displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. In this case, the play data from the start of Unimemo to the present is not cleared. When the end confirmation image is displayed on the main screen 111, the play data from the start of the unimemo to the present may be cleared. In this case, the end confirmation menu may not be displayed on the sub screen 112.

  FIG. 131 shows a state where a registration code for member registration is displayed on the main screen 111. As shown in FIG. 131, below the registration code for member registration on the main screen 111, the characters “If you are a beginner, please access from this registration code and obtain your password” are displayed.

  When a registration code for member registration is displayed on the main screen 111, a menu for member registration is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the menu for member registration include “password entry”, “return to game”, and “return”.

  When the player touches “Password Input” in the menu for member registration, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, and a password input menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 122). Thereby, the player can input the password.

  When the player touches “return to game” in the menu at the time of member registration, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the display screen when playing a game or when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial video to be displayed is displayed. In addition, even when the player has not touched any of the menu items at the time of member registration and a predetermined time has elapsed, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect video displayed when playing the game. Alternatively, an initial video that is displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, when the player touches “Return” in the menu at the time of member registration, a unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and a unimemo menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 121).

  FIG. 132 shows a state in which an array / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. The array / payout initial image includes characters “Please select“ array ”/“ payout ””, an image related to the array, and an image related to the payout.

  As shown in FIG. 132, when the arrangement / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the arrangement / payout menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112. The items of the array / payout menu include “to array”, “to payout”, “return to game”, and “return”.

  When the player touches “to array” in the array / payout menu, an image showing all the arrays related to the pachislot 1 is displayed on the main screen 111 (not shown). Further, when the player touches “Payout”, an image showing all distributions and the like related to the pachislot 1 is displayed on the main screen 111 (not shown).

  When the player touches “return to game” in the arrangement / payout menu, the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 are displayed on the main screen 111 and the sub-screen 112 when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial video to be displayed is displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has passed without the player touching any of the items in the arrangement / payout menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 display an effect video displayed when playing the game. Alternatively, an initial video that is displayed when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, even when the player performs a tilting operation on the bet buttons 14 and 15 or the start lever 16 in a state where the arrangement / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 are displayed. Shows an effect video displayed when a game is played and an initial video displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period.

  When the player touches “Return” in the arrangement / payout menu, a guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 and a guide menu is displayed on the sub-screen 112 (see FIG. 120).

  FIG. 133 shows a state where the model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111. As shown in FIG. 133, below the model site registration code on the main screen 111, the characters “More detailed model introduction can be checked even with a mobile phone” are displayed. When the model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, for example, a background image showing a character related to the pachislot 1 may be displayed.

  When the player reads the model site registration code with the portable terminal, the URL of the website introducing information related to the model of the pachislot 1 is acquired. Information on the type of the pachislot machine 1 includes, for example, the type and image of the production, the recommended hitting method (for example, the pressing order, the pattern to be aimed in the left display frame 4L, etc.), the introduction of the character, the game flow (RT gaming state Transition flow).

  When the model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, a model site introduction menu is displayed on the sub screen 112. The items in the model site introduction menu include “Start Unimemo”, “Dividend / Arrangement”, “Model Site”, and “Return”.

  The items in the model site introduction menu are the same as the items in the guide menu (see FIG. 120). Even if the player touches “model site” in the model site introduction menu, the display on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 112 does not change. That is, the model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111, and the model site introduction menu is displayed on the sub screen 112.

[Action of pachislot 1]
In the present embodiment, “BR1” and “BR2” are provided as “BR”. When “BR1” continues for a prescribed number (for example, “20”) or more, the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) and the start of “BR1” are determined. Thereby, in “BR1”, the result of the continuous lottery can include a sense of expectation other than the determination of the number of added games, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the game of the present invention, even if “BR1” is not continuous “20” or more, a lottery is performed at the end of the “BR1” to win the first ART (pseudo bonus) and “BR1” ”May be determined.

  In addition, “BR2” determines the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) regardless of the number of times of continuation. Thereby, during “BR2”, the expectation can be concentrated only on the result of continuous lottery (determination of the number of additional games). As a result, “BR1” and “BR2” differ in what the player expects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, “CZ1” and “CZ2” are provided as “CZ”, which are different from each other in the prescribed number of times of “navigating to the black BAR” (notification of display auxiliary information). Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation which of “CZ1” and “CZ2” is determined, and to improve the interest of the game related to “CZ1” and “CZ2”.

  In this embodiment, “CZ1” basically ends when “navigating to the black BAR” is performed four times, and “CZ2” basically proceeds to “navigating to the black BAR” 10 times. When done, it ends. Therefore, “navigating to black BAR” (notification of display auxiliary information) is never performed, and “CZ1” or “CZ2” never ends, and the interest of “CZ1” and “CZ2” is not reduced. Can be.

  In addition, as a gaming machine according to the present invention, in “CZ1” and “CZ2”, a specific number of times (for example, “30”) of the game is executed before the number of times “navigating to the black BAR” reaches a specified number. Once digested, the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) may be determined. As a result, the player has a sense of expectation that the winning of the first ART (pseudo bonus) will be determined even when there are many games in which “navigation for black BAR” is not performed in “CZ1” and “CZ2”. Can be made. As a result, the interest of “CZ1” and “CZ2” can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to add “1” to the specified number of times of “navigating to the black BAR” is determined by the cut-in addition lottery process during CZ. Thereby, during “CZ1” and “CZ2”, the number of times of “navigating to the black BAR” may increase, so that the interest of the specific game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery process is out of place (predetermined internal winning combination), it is determined whether or not to execute “aiming for black BAR” by the cut-in occurrence lottery process during CZ. To do. As a result, when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not determined as an internal winning combination and “navigating to black BAR” is executed, The combination is not stopped and displayed, but the combination is stopped. As a result, in a game in which “navigating to the black BAR” is executed, it is possible to prevent a medal from being missed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a provisional causal value is determined according to the type of effect (development effect), and the causal value is determined by correcting the provisional causal value within the value range of the internal point counter. Then, when “1” is added to the causal value stock counter because the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100”, a privilege advantageous to the player is given (for example, the pseudo bonus type is assigned to the higher rank). Change to a pseudo bonus).

  As a result, there is a possibility that the causal value may be accumulated even if the notification by the effect (development effect) is not advantageous to the player, and it is expected that a privilege advantageous to the player will be given later. You can have it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating even when notification by the effect (development effect) is often not advantageous to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a privilege advantageous to the player is given, a causal value stock consumption lottery is performed to determine whether or not the value of the causal value stock is subtracted by “1”. Thereby, there is a possibility that a privilege advantageous to the player can be obtained without consuming the accumulated causal value (causal value stock). When the causal value (causal value stock) is not consumed, another privilege advantageous to the player is given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, special internal winning combinations (winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”) are determined as the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means in the first ART (pseudo bonus). When an “internal winning combination” is determined and “reverse push navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” is performed, the winning of the second ART or the winning of BR is determined. Further, in the first ART, the number of games added to the first ART is determined according to the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means.

  And in the game that consumes the determined number of added games, the game that consumes the number of games of the first ART determined at the start of the first ART (“30”, “60”, or “100”), When a special internal winning combination is determined, there is a high probability that “reverse-pressed navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” will be performed. In other words, a game that consumes an additional number of games in the first ART is in a high-probability state in which there is a high probability that the winning of the second ART or the winning of BR will be determined.

  Therefore, as long as the first ART is being executed (predetermined period), all games played in the high probability state can be digested at any time. As a result, even when a high probability state is reached just before the end of the period during which the first ART is being executed, the expectation that the winning of the second ART or the winning of the BR is determined can be prevented from decreasing. The game interest in the first ART can be maintained until the end.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a benefit is to be given, and “Guide to black BAR navigation” (notification of display auxiliary information) is determined in the reverse-pushing navigation lottery process (see S569 in FIG. 104). In this case, “navigating to the black BAR” is executed. As a result, “navigating to the black BAR” is executed not only when the special symbol combination corresponding to the special internal winning combination can be stopped but also when the special symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed. The

  Therefore, even when it is never determined that the benefit is given in the first ART, there is a possibility that the “navigating to the black BAR” is executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special symbol combination may be stopped and displayed in the first ART, and the interest of the game in the first ART can be improved. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined to continue “BR1” or “BR2” to the next set, it is determined whether or not to execute any one of a plurality of additional additions during the BR additional addition lottery process. decide. The additional additions C1, C2, and C3 of the plurality of additional addition effects are continued until an additional addition C is added and G number lottery is performed every time an operation on the MAX bet button 14 is detected. As a result, if the player does not win without continuation, the number of added games increases each time an operation is performed on the MAX bet button 14, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, if an operation on the start lever 16 is detected before no continuation is won in the additional addition C1, C2, C3, the additional addition C number G is automatically added even if the operation on the MAX bet button 14 is not detected. Perform lottery (automatic additional extra lottery). Thereby, when there is no time or when the operation on the MAX bet button 14 is troublesome, the additional addition C addition G number lottery based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 can be omitted.

  In addition, the number of additional games can be obtained in the same manner as in the case of performing the additional addition C addition G number lottery based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14. Furthermore, when automatically performing additional addition C addition G number lottery, since the upper limit value (for example, “1000”) is provided for the number of lotteries, automatic addition additional C addition G number lottery continues indefinitely. Can be prevented.

2. Second Embodiment Next, a pachislot machine that is a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  The pachislot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the same configuration as the pachislo machine 1 of the first embodiment. The place where the pachislot machine according to the second embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 is the game start lock process performed in S10 of the main operation process of the pachislot machine 1. Therefore, here, with reference to FIG. 134, only the game start lock process in the pachislot according to the second embodiment will be described, and description of other operations and the configuration of the pachislot will be omitted.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S901). The reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag of the present embodiment is a reel effect (specific display row effect) in which a time retrograde reel action (before a stop operation) and a time retrograde reel action (after a stop operation) are combined into one set. It is data for. When this reel effect pattern is set, the time for one set is set in the lock timer.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is “0” (S902). In S902, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is “0” (when S902 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the game start lock process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 78). (Refer to S11).

  On the other hand, in S902, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is not “0” (NO in S902), the main CPU 93 indicates that the reel effect pattern is a time retroactive reel action (before the stop operation). Whether or not (S903).

  When the content of the reel effect pattern during the game lock is a time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation), the same process as the rotation process (acceleration process) for forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R performed in a normal game Is done. That is, when the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) is performed, the same reel action as when the stop button is activated after the start operation is performed in a normal game is performed. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether or not a game lock has occurred immediately after the start operation (lever on).

  In addition, when the content of the reel effect pattern is a time retrograde reel action (after a stop operation), a rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in reverse is performed. The time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) shows a specific example of the first reel action according to the gaming machine of the present invention, and the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation) is the second reel according to the gaming machine of the present invention. A specific example of an action is shown.

  In S903, when the main CPU 93 determines that the reel effect pattern is not a time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) (when S903 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S902, and performs the processes after S902. repeat.

  The case where the value of the lock timer is not “0” and the reel effect pattern is not the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) corresponds to the case where the reel effect pattern is the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation). Therefore, in this case, a reel effect is produced in which the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate backward.

  On the other hand, in S903, when the main CPU 93 determines that the reel effect pattern is a time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) (when S903 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a pressing operation on the stop button. Is discriminated (S904). In S904, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no pressing operation on the stop button (when S904 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S902 and repeats the processes after S902.

  If the reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag is set and there is no pressing operation to the stop button during execution of the time retrograde reel action (before stop operation), the time retrograde reel action (stop) After operation) is started. That is, when the rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in a forward direction is performed for a predetermined time, the rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction is performed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S904 that there is a pressing operation on the stop button (when S904 is YES), the main CPU 93 rewrites the reel effect pattern and the lock timer (S905). After the processing of S905, the main CPU 93 returns the processing to S902 and repeats the processing after S902.

  If the pressing operation on the stop button is performed before the rotation process for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R forward is completed (before the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are reversely rotated), it corresponds to the game lock flag. The execution of the reel effect pattern (specific display row effect) is interrupted, and another reel effect pattern (predetermined display row effect) is executed. That is, the type of reel effect pattern is rewritten. The reel effect pattern (predetermined display row effect) to be rewritten in this embodiment is the same as the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation), and the value of the lock timer to be rewritten is the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation). It is the same as the time to do.

  In other words, if a pressing operation is performed on the stop button during execution of the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation), the time retrograde reel action (stop operation) is not executed until the end of the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation). After) is executed. Therefore, if the player presses the stop button during the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation), the game lock for the remaining time of the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) is shortened. The

  Note that even if a pressing operation on the stop button is performed during execution of the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation), the reel effect pattern and the lock timer are not rewritten.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the game lock is started, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate (time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation)) as in a normal game. When the player performs a stop operation (pressing operation on the stop button), the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are not stopped, but the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated in reverse (time retroactive reel action (after the stop operation)). To do. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not a game lock is generated immediately after the start operation, and it is possible to maintain the expectation of the occurrence of the game lock. Then, the player recognizes that a game lock has occurred immediately after the stop operation.

  In the present embodiment, as the above-described fixed time, a time slightly longer than the time from when the start operation is performed until the stop button is activated is set. As a result, if the player does not perform a stop operation before the time required to activate the stop button, the game lock has occurred before the time required to activate the stop button elapses. It can be prevented from being recognized by the player. In addition, if the player performs a stop operation immediately after the time until the stop button is activated, the player can have an illusion that a game lock has occurred immediately after the stop operation.

  As a result, if it is assumed that a normal game has started based on detection of the start operation (lever on), the player can be suddenly recognized (misidentified) as if a game lock has occurred, and the game lock The production effect can be enhanced. In addition, although the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are supposed to be stopped by the stop operation, the stop operation is actually invalid, and the time retroactive reel action (after the stop operation) in a specific display row effect or a predetermined display row effect ) Is executed, it is possible to make the player feel a great surprise and improve the interest of the game.

  In S905, the reel effect pattern (predetermined display row effect) to be rewritten is not limited to the reverse rotation reel action, and can be set as appropriate. In S905, the reel effect pattern and the lock timer to be rewritten may be determined by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not to rewrite the reel effect pattern and the lock timer is determined based on the type of time retroactive reel action and the presence / absence of a stop operation. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the reel effect pattern and the lock timer are rewritten based on the time elapsed since the reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag was started (set) and the presence or absence of the stop operation. It may be determined whether or not. The time elapsed since the reel effect pattern corresponding to the game lock flag was started (set) may be detected by providing a separate timer, or detecting that the value of the lock timer becomes a specific value. You may grasp by.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation) is started when a certain time has elapsed after the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) is started. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the time retrograde reel action (before the stop operation) is executed until the stop operation is performed, and the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation) is triggered when the stop operation is performed. The configuration may be started. At this time, the count of the lock timer is stopped so that the period for performing the game lock does not end when a predetermined time elapses (the lock timer becomes 0).

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a time retrograde reel action (after a stop operation), a rotation process for reversely rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed. However, the change in the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the case of the time retrograde reel action (after the stop operation), that is, the second reel action, for example, causes the symbol to vibrate by alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation. A thing may be sufficient and can be set arbitrarily.

3. Third Embodiment Next, a pachislot machine which is a gaming machine showing a third embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  The pachislot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the same configuration as the pachislo machine 1 of the first embodiment. The pachislot machine according to the third embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 in the front door 2b. Therefore, here, the front door 2b in the pachi-slot according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 135 is a plan view of the front door 302b in the pachislot machine according to the third embodiment as seen from the front (player side). As shown in FIG. 135, a door main body, a front panel 310, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device are provided. The front panel 310 and the liquid crystal display device 11 are attached to the upper part of the door body.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit 11a formed in a quadrangle, and performs an effect by displaying an image. A touch sensor module is disposed on the entire surface of the display unit 11a. Similar to the touch sensor module 31 according to the first embodiment, this touch sensor module is a surface capacitive touch sensor. Therefore, a touch input unit 331a using a touch sensor module is configured on the entire surface of the display unit 11a.

  The size of the front panel 310 is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 310 is disposed so as to overlap the display unit 11 a side of the liquid crystal display device 11 and is formed in a frame shape having a panel opening 310 a for exposing the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The front panel 310 is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 21 and a decoration unit 321. The LED group 21 turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the production contents. The movable decorative unit 321 is disposed at substantially the center of the upper side of the front panel 310, has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) (not shown), and is shown in FIG. 135 by a drive motor and a drive mechanism (not shown). From the standby position, it is possible to move down to the effect position in front of the display unit 11a and to vibrate at the standby position. The movable decoration unit 321 is lit with a color and a light emission pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect, for example, when a suction effect described later is performed.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the front door 302b. The pedestal unit 12 is provided with a symbol display area 304 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The display window 304 is disposed on the front side overlapping the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The display window 304 functions as a display window, and is configured to be able to pass through the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 304.

  When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 is stopped, among the plural types of symbols of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, the upper, middle, and lower stages in the frame are displayed. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, a pseudo line formed by combining any one of predetermined regions among the three regions consisting of the upper, middle, and lower tiers facing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R of the display window 4 is awarded. It is defined as a line (winning determination line) that is a target for determining whether or not.

  The pedestal 12 is provided with a medal slot 13, a MAX bet button 14, a 1 bet button 15, a start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R, and an effect button 322 that are to be operated by the player. . The medal slot 13, the MAX bet button 14, the 1 bet button 15, the start lever 16, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. The effect button 322 can be used as an input unit when, for example, an expansion effect, a transparency change effect, and a swell appearance appear later.

  As in the first embodiment, a medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower portion of the door body (see FIG. 2). The LED group 21, the movable decoration unit 321, and the speakers 20L and 20R are specific examples of the effect device according to the present invention.

[Touch input operation]
Next, a basic investigation of the touch input unit 331a will be described.

-Tap operation Tap operation is operation which taps the touch input part 331a with a finger | toe. This tap operation corresponds to a click operation with a mouse which is one of input means. The tap operation may be an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the effect button 322 according to the present embodiment.

-Double tap operation Double tap operation is operation which taps the touch input part 331a twice. This tap operation corresponds to a double click operation with a mouse which is one of input means. Note that the double tap operation may be an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the effect button 322 according to the present embodiment, for example, an operation corresponding to the continuous operation of the output button 322.

Long tap operation The long tap operation is an operation of touching the touch input unit 331a, and is an operation of touching the touch input unit 331a for a longer time than the operation time (touch time) in the tap operation described above. As this long tap operation, it can also be called a touch-and-hold operation and a long press operation, for example. The long tap operation may be an operation corresponding to the effect button 322 according to the present embodiment.

Drag operation The drag operation is an operation of moving a finger while touching the touch input unit 331a. This drag operation corresponds to a drag operation with a mouse which is one of input means. In the present embodiment, the flick operation for quickly moving the finger on the touch input unit 331a and the swipe operation for sliding the finger to the input target key are positioned as operations equivalent to the drag operation.

Multi-tap operation Multi-tap operation is a general term for operations that touch the touch input unit 331a with a plurality of fingers. As this multi-tap operation, there are a rotation operation, a pinch-out operation, a pinch-in operation, and the like. The rotation operation includes an operation of turning another finger touching the touch input unit 331a using one finger touching the touch input unit 331a as a fulcrum. The pinch-out operation is an operation for expanding a predetermined area by expanding a space between two fingers touching the touch input unit 331a. The pinch-in operation is an operation for shrinking a predetermined area by shrinking between two fingers touching the touch input unit 331a.

[Various effects using the touch input unit]
Next, various effects performed using the touch input unit 31a will be described with reference to the drawings.

(1) State suggestion touch effect First, the state suggestion touch effect which alert | reports a state suggestion using the touch input part 331a is demonstrated with reference to FIGS. 136-139. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating a state suggestion touch effect using the touch input unit 331a in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  In this embodiment, the lottery result of the ART lottery process during BB (S566 in FIG. 104) and the ART lottery process during RB (S571) is suggested by the state suggestion touch effect. That is, the result of the ART lottery in the present embodiment shows a specific example of the “state” according to the present invention. The “state” according to the present invention is not limited to the result of the ART lottery, and may be various information notified to the player. Examples of the “state” according to the present invention include a bonus winning, determination of the number of additional games of ART, and mode transition.

  In this embodiment, a state suggestion touch effect is executed during BB and RB, and an animal image 351 and a girl image 352 are displayed on the display unit 11a. The animal image 351 shows a specific example of the first display object according to the present invention, and the girl image 352 shows a specific example of the second display object according to the present invention. The animal image 351 is displayed in a first area provided on the lower left side of the display unit 11a. The girl image 352 is displayed in a second area provided at the lower right side of the display unit 11a.

  The first area and the second area are outside the movement range of the movable decoration unit 321 and are set to positions where the player's finger does not contact the movable decoration unit 321 even if the movable decoration unit 321 moves during the touch operation. It is desirable from the viewpoint of safety. By designing in this way, even if an effect of moving the movable decoration unit 321 according to a touch operation is performed, the movable decoration unit 321 is suppressed while reducing the risk of contact between the player's finger and the movable decoration unit 321. The effect of moving the can be executed.

  In executing the effect, the sub-control board 42 refers to the state (ART winning or non-winning) before receiving the tap operation, and whether or not to execute the response effect and the content of the response effect to be performed. To decide. In the case where the response effect is not executed, even if the process corresponding to the subsequent tap operation is not performed, the same process as when the response effect is determined is advanced, and then the response effect is performed. Even if “no effect” is executed as one aspect, any processing may be performed as long as the player can recognize that no response effect has occurred. Then, after determining whether or not to execute the response effect, the tap operation by the player can be accepted at a predetermined timing.

  When the player performs a tap operation (or a long tap operation) on either the first area where the animal image 351 is displayed or the second area where the girl image 352 is displayed, the area where the tap operation is performed If it is an area where it is determined to execute the response effect, the determined response effect is executed. On the other hand, if the area where the tap operation has been performed is determined to not execute the response effect, the response effect is not executed. In the present embodiment, as a response effect, a message effect that outputs a message indicating a state from the speakers 20L and 20R is performed.

  As the serif effect, a first serif effect, a second serif effect, a third serif effect, a fourth serif effect, and a first serif effect are provided. When the first line effect is executed, the accuracy indicating the ART win is “none (0%)”, and when the second line effect is executed, the accuracy indicating the ART win is “low”. is there.

  When the third serif effect is executed, the accuracy indicating the ART win is “medium”, and when the fourth serif effect is executed, the accuracy indicating the ART win is “high”. Further, when the fifth serif effect is executed, the accuracy indicating the ART winning is “determined”. That is, the player can recognize that the ART is not won when the first serif effect is executed, and can recognize that the ART is won when the fifth serif effect is executed. .

  Further, when the third serif effect is executed, the ART win is expected more than when the second serif effect is executed. When the fourth serif effect is executed, the ART win is expected more than when the third serif effect is executed.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display object and the presence / absence of speech production according to the state suggestion accuracy. “◯” (circle) shown in FIG. 137 indicates that a response effect is performed, and “−” indicates that a response effect is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 137, in the determination of the response effect, the ratio of determining that there is a response effect is different between the first area and the second area as the tap search target. When the tap investigation target is the first region in which the animal image 351 is displayed, a speech effect (response effect) with a state suggestion accuracy of “low” or “none” does not occur as a type of response effect. On the other hand, when the target of the tap search is the second region in which the girl image 352 is displayed, it is determined that there is a response effect so that a speech effect (response effect) is always executed.

FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between state suggestion accuracy and appearance magnification.
A state A shown in FIG. 138 is a state where ART is not won, and a state B is a state where ART is won.

As shown in FIG. 138, if the first dialogue effect in which the state suggestion accuracy is “none” in the state A is determined as “1”, the state suggestion accuracy is “none” in the state B. The magnification X at which the first line production is determined satisfies the following expression 1.
X = 1 (Formula 1)
That is, in the case of the state A and the state B, the first speech effect having the state suggestion accuracy of “none” is determined with the same probability.

Further, when the state of the second dialogue production having the state suggestion accuracy of “low” is determined to be “1” in the state A, the state of the second dialogue production having the state indication accuracy of “low” is assumed to be “1”. The magnification X at which is determined satisfies the following Expression 2.
1.05 ≧ X> 2 (Formula 2)
Therefore, the probability that the second line effect with the state suggestion accuracy “low” is determined in the state B is the probability that the second line effect with the state suggestion accuracy “low” is determined in the state A. Higher than.

Further, when the state dialogue accuracy is determined to be “medium” in the state A and the case is determined as “1”, the state dialogue accuracy is “medium” in the case of the state B. The magnification X at which is determined satisfies the following Expression 3.
2 ≧ X> 1.05 (Formula 3)
Therefore, the probability that the state suggestion accuracy is “medium” when the state suggestion accuracy is “B” is determined in the state B, and the probability that the third speech effect is determined when the state suggestion accuracy is “medium” in the state A. Higher than.

In addition, when the state of the fourth speech production having the state suggestion accuracy of “high” is determined as “1” in the state A, the state of the fourth speech production having the state suggestion accuracy of “high” is assumed in the state B. The magnification X at which is determined satisfies the following Expression 4.
X> 2 (Formula 4)
Therefore, when the state B is the state B, the probability that the state suggestion accuracy is “high” is determined. The probability that the state suggestion accuracy is “high” when the state A is the state 4 accuracy is determined. Higher than.

  In the case of the state A, the fifth serif effect having the state suggestion accuracy of “determined” is not determined. On the other hand, in the case of the state B, the fifth serif effect whose state suggestion accuracy is “determined” is determined. Therefore, when the fifth line effect with the state suggestion accuracy of “confirmed” is executed, it is determined that the state B is in effect.

FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between state suggestion accuracy, appearance probability, and expectation.
As shown in FIG. 139, in this embodiment, when the state suggestion accuracy is “low”, the probability (appearance probability) that states A and B are determined is set to 1/100. The probability (appearance probability) that state B is determined is set to 1/100 regardless of the state suggestion accuracy.

  Further, when the state suggestion accuracy is “low”, the value of X is set to “1.05”, and the probability (appearance probability) that state A is determined is set to 1/105. When the state suggestion accuracy is “medium”, the value of X is set to “2”, and the probability that the state A is determined (appearance probability) is set to 1/200. When the state suggestion accuracy is “high”, the value of X is set to “6”, and the probability that the state A is determined (appearance probability) is set to 1/600.

  The “expected degree at the time of appearance” shown in FIG. 139 is the probability of “state (ART winning or non-winning)” when a response effect (serial effect) corresponding to the state suggestion accuracy is executed. For example, in the case where the first line effect with the state suggestion accuracy of “none” is executed, the probability of being in state A (ART non-winning) is 50%, and the probability of being in state B (ART winning) is 50%. is there.

  In addition, when the second line effect with the state suggestion accuracy of “low” is executed, the probability of being in state A (ART non-winning) is 49%, and the probability of being in state B (ART winning) is 51%. is there. In addition, when the third line effect with the state suggestion accuracy of “medium” is executed, the probability of being in state A (ART non-winning) is 33%, and the probability of being in state B (ART winning) is 67%. is there.

  In addition, when the fourth line effect with a state suggestion accuracy of “high” is executed, the probability of being in state A (ART non-winning) is 14%, and the probability of being in state B (ART winning) is 86%. is there. And when the 5th line production whose state suggestion accuracy is "definite" is performed, the probability of being in the state B (ART winning) is 100%.

  In the state suggestion touch effect, a first region where an animal image 351 is displayed and a second region where a girl image 352 is displayed are provided, and a player can select a target for a tap operation (or a long tap operation). did. Thereby, for example, a player who is resistant to the tap operation on the second area where the girl image 352 is displayed can tap the first area where the animal image 351 is displayed. As a result, participation in the production using the touch sensor module can be promoted, and the interest of the production using the touch sensor module can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the tap operation for the first area and the second area is effective only once for either one. For example, when a tap operation on the first area and the second area is detected at the same time, it is handled as a tap operation on the second area where the frequency of response effects is high.

  Further, when the tap operation is performed on the first area where the animal image 351 is displayed, it is determined that the response effect is performed when the state suggestion accuracy is “medium” or more, and the state suggestion accuracy is “ In the case of “low” or “none”, it is not determined to perform the response effect. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a response effect (so-called “lively effect”) with low accuracy indicating that the state suggestion accuracy is low and suggesting that the state B (ART winning) is advantageous to the player.

  Therefore, in the state suggestion touch effect, an animal image 351 is displayed for a player who prefers that the frequency of the response effect is low, indicating that the state B (ART winning) is advantageous for the player, and the accuracy is low. A notification that recommends a tap operation on the first region is performed. Thereby, participation in the production using the touch sensor module can be promoted.

  In the state suggestion touch effect according to the present embodiment, a speech effect is adopted as a response effect. However, as the response effect according to the present invention, for example, a light effect using the LED group 21, a video effect using the liquid crystal display device 11, a movable effect or light effect using the movable decoration unit 321, or a sound, The effect may be a combination of light and video.

  As the state suggestion touch effect according to the present invention, for example, a specific response effect that combines a video effect using the liquid crystal display device 11 and a serif effect using the speakers 20L and 20R may be performed. In this specific response effect, for example, the animal image 351 or the girl image 352 operates according to the state suggestion accuracy, and outputs a line corresponding to the state suggestion accuracy.

  When the tap operation is performed on the first area in which the animal image 351 is displayed, the specific response effect with the state suggestion accuracy of “low” or “none” does not occur. However, in this case, the line effect is not executed, and only the video effect (response effect) in which the animal image 351 operates is executed. As a result, the player can recognize that the tap operation has been detected by the movement of the animal image 351, and the state suggestion accuracy is recognized as “low” or “none” due to the absence of the dialogue effect. Can be made.

  In the state suggestion touch effect according to the present embodiment, when a tap operation is performed on the first region where the animal image 351 is displayed, a response effect (specific identification) with a state suggestion accuracy of “low” or “none” is specified. Response production) does not occur. However, as the state suggestion touch effect according to the present invention, the state suggestion accuracy at which it is not determined to perform the response effect (specific response effect) can be arbitrarily set. For example, when a tap operation is performed on the first region, if an effect other than the “stated” state suggestion accuracy is determined as the type of response effect (specific response effect), the response effect (specific response effect) It may not be decided to perform.

  In the present embodiment, it can be said that the presence or absence of the response effect changes depending on which category of “none”, “low”, “medium”, “high”, and “confirmed” the effect belongs to in the suggestion accuracy classification. In the design of the gaming machine, it is necessary to adjust the balance of appearance frequency so that both the game styles are more interesting, assuming both the player who operates the first area and the player who operates the second area. There is.

  For example, in the case where a lottery table that is determined once for each effect that appears finally is defined, both a player who operates the first area and a player who operates the second area are assumed. When calculating the appearance frequency of effects, it is necessary to classify and sum up the categories of effects. Therefore, the calculation process becomes complicated, and the time spent for balance adjustment becomes enormous.

  Therefore, in the process of determining the effect such as effect lottery, the category is first determined, and then, the specification for determining the effect to be finally executed in the category is set. Thereby, it is easy to obtain the effect appearance rate for each category, the response effect appearance rate assuming a player with a different preference is easily calculated, and the development period is shortened.

  As a specific example, first, a category is determined from among “none”, “low”, “medium”, “high”, and “confirmed” in the first lottery (effect category lottery). Here, for example, it is assumed that “low” is determined. After that, in the second lottery (effect content lottery), an effect to appear from among “low effect A”, “low effect B”, “low effect C”,. Here, when “low production C” is determined, “low production C” can be executed.

  In this case, when the player taps the first area, the “low effect C” is not performed, and when the player taps the second area, the “low effect C” is performed. In the category determination, “None” and “Low” that do not respond at the time of a tap operation on the first region are set as the first group, and the others are set as the second group, and the first lottery is roughly divided according to the presence or absence of the response effect. You may do it.

  In the state suggestion touch effect according to the present embodiment, an animal image 351 is displayed in the first area, and a girl image 352 is displayed in the second area. However, as the state suggestion touch effect according to the present invention, images to be displayed in the first area and the second area can be arbitrarily set. In addition, the images displayed in the first area and the second area are not necessarily different, and may be the same image.

  In this embodiment, the ART lottery process during BB (S566 in FIG. 104) and the ART lottery process during RB (S571 in FIG. 104) are performed for each game. Therefore, a state suggestion touch effect can always be performed during BB or RB. However, the state suggestion touch effect according to the present invention may be performed when a specific condition is satisfied. Specific conditions include, for example, a case where it is determined that the state suggestion touch effect is determined by lottery, when the ART is won, when the ART non-winning continues until reaching a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games), etc. Can be mentioned.

(2) Suction Effect Next, the suction effect performed using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 147. 140 to 142 are diagrams showing a state of suction effect using the touch input unit 331a in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, when the ART is not won during BB or RB, the suction effect is executed after the end of BB or after the end of RB, and it is suggested that the causal value is obtained. In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a value of “causal value” is obtained not only in the case of not winning the ART but also in various scenes where the interest of the game is reduced (the player feels uncomfortable).

  The assigned causal value is counted by a causal value counter, and a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the accumulated “causal value”. Therefore, even if a scene in which the interest of the game is reduced occurs, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained thereafter. It should be noted that the “causal value” according to the present invention may be a predetermined value or may be determined by lottery.

  When the “causal value” is given and the suction effect is executed, a notification that prompts the user to perform a long tap operation (long press) on a desired point on the display unit 11a is performed. Examples of the notification that prompts the user to perform a long tap operation on the desired point include voices output from the speakers 20L and 20R, characters displayed on the display unit 11a, and the like.

  When the player performs a long tap operation with a finger on a desired point on the display unit 11a, the touch input unit 331a acquires the touch coordinates, and a black spider image 354 is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates. The black haze image 354 is a specific example of the predetermined image according to the present invention. This black wrinkle image 354 spreads in a circular manner in a predetermined area so as to ooze out from the finger that has been operated by a long tap until a specific period elapses (see FIG. 140). This specific period can be set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the black haze image 354 proceeds so as to extend toward the decoration unit 321, reaches the upper side of the display unit 11 a, and disappears (see FIG. 142). On the other hand, the decoration unit 321 lights up with a light-emitting pattern of a dark color according to the timing when the black glaze image 354 reaches the upper side of the display unit 11a and disappears. Examples of the dim light emission pattern include black and gray (gray).

  As a result, it is possible to make the image appear as if the black candy image 354 was sucked into the decoration unit 321. As a result, it is possible to express that the “causal value” obtained in various scenes where the interest of the game is reduced (the player feels uncomfortable) is sucked into the decoration unit 321.

FIG. 143 to FIG. 145 are explanatory diagrams showing a method for displaying an image of a suction effect.
As shown in FIG. 143, the video data displayed in the suction effect represents a black eyelid image 354 generated from the display unit 11a and proceeding straight upward. In the present embodiment, the black eyelid image 354 displayed by the video data is tilted according to the touch coordinates so that the black eyelid image 354 advances toward the decoration unit 321.

  When a long tap operation is performed on a desired point on the display unit 11a, touch coordinates are detected. Then, the position where the black eyelid image 354 occurs is displaced from the center to the touch coordinates (see FIG. 144). In the video data at this time, the black heel image 354 advances straight upward from the touch coordinates. That is, the black haze image 354 proceeds along a line that is substantially perpendicular to the upper side of the display unit 11a.

  Next, the angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is calculated, and the black eyelid image 354 that goes straight up from the touch coordinates is tilted (see FIG. 145). As a result, video data in which the black eyelid image 354 advances toward the decoration unit 321 is created. In the present embodiment, goal coordinates are set at the center of the decoration unit 321 arranged outside the display unit 11a.

  The angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates can be calculated using a trigonometric function. In the present embodiment, the center coordinate of the display unit 11a is (0, 0), the left side of the display unit 11a is -640, and the right side of the display unit 11a is 640. In addition, the upper side of the display unit 11a is set to 360, and the lower side of the display unit 11a is set to -360. The center coordinates of the decoration unit 321 are (0, 460).

  Based on the touch coordinates and the center coordinates (0, 460) of the decoration unit 321, the angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is calculated by a trigonometric function. For example, when the touch coordinates are (460, 0), the angle of the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is 60 degrees.

FIG. 146 shows a moving route of the black eyelid image 354 when the touch coordinates are detected in the lower left portion of the display unit 11a.
As shown in FIG. 146, when the touch coordinates are detected in the lower left part of the display unit 11a, the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is the part where the decoration unit 321 and the upper side of the display unit 11a are in contact (the central part on the upper side). ) Therefore, the black haze image 354 appears to be sucked into the decoration unit 321 through the central portion on the upper side of the display unit 11a.

FIG. 147 shows a moving route of the black eyelid image 354 when the touch coordinates are detected in the upper left portion of the display unit 11a.
As shown in FIG. 147, when the touch coordinates are detected in the upper left portion of the display unit 11a, the line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates is connected to the part where the decoration unit 321 and the upper side of the display unit 11a are in contact with the display unit 11a. Pass through the middle of the upper left corner. Therefore, the black haze image 354 passes through the left side of the center of the upper side of the display unit 11a, exits from the display unit 11a, and then appears to be sucked into the decoration unit 321.

  In the suction effect, any point on the display unit 11a can be displayed with a long tapping operation, and a video in which the black eyelid image 354 advances from the touch coordinates toward the goal coordinates (center of the decoration unit 321) can be displayed. Thereby, the player can arbitrarily determine the point at which the black spider image 354 occurs, and the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module can be improved.

  In the suction effect, the same image is used to advance the black eyelid image 354 by changing the angle at which the black eyelid image 354 moves. As a result, the amount of data can be suppressed and the video control process can be prevented from being complicated as compared with the case where a plurality of pieces of video data in which the black eyelid image 354 advances are provided according to the touch coordinates.

  Further, in the suction effect, until the specific period elapses, the black eyelid image 354 spreads in a circular shape in a predetermined area so as to ooze from the finger that has been operated by a long tap. Thereby, it can be shown that the image 354 of the black candy appeared from a player's finger, and the interest of the production using the touch sensor module can be improved.

  The black eyelid image 354 that appears after the touch coordinates are detected is tilted at an angle that advances when it appears. However, since the black shark image 354 spreads in a circular shape so that it oozes out, it can be difficult to understand that the black shark image 354 that appears is tilted. As a result, after the black eyelid image 354 has spread, it can appear to be sucked into the decoration unit 321 smoothly.

  In the suction effect according to the present embodiment, goal coordinates are set on the decoration unit 321 arranged outside the display unit 11a. However, as a suction effect according to the present invention, the goal coordinates may be set on any side of the display unit 11a.

  In the suction effect according to the present embodiment, the black haze image 354 is spread in a circular shape. However, in the suction effect according to the present invention, the shape of the image spreading around the touch coordinates can be arbitrarily set. Note that the shape of the image spreading around the touch coordinates is preferably a shape that is difficult to recognize that it is inclined in the advancing direction. For example, it may be a polygon close to a circle.

  In the suction effect according to the present embodiment, the area of the black eyelid image 354 that spreads over a predetermined area including the touch coordinates is the same. However, as the suction effect according to the present invention, the area of the black haze image 354 spreading in the predetermined area may be changed according to the assigned causal value (given privilege). For example, the area of the black eyelid image 354 may be proportional to the causal value. In this case, the player can estimate the size of the causal value (granted privilege) given by the size of the black spider image 354, and improve the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module. Can do.

  So far, the movable decoration unit 321 is abbreviated as the decoration unit 321, and the suction effect in the aspect in which the movable decoration unit 321 is arranged at the standby position has been described. Hereinafter, the suction effect in the aspect in which the movable decoration unit 321 is movable will be described.

  The first effect pattern is to cause a long tap operation after the movable decoration unit 321 moves (lowers) to the effect position. When the suction effect of the first effect pattern is executed, first, the movable decoration unit 321 moves from the standby position to the effect position in front of the display unit 11a, and keeps the hand and face away from the moving area. Is displayed on the display unit 11a, and a warning sound for alerting the player is output.

  Note that a distance measuring sensor such as an infrared sensor may be provided in the vicinity of the movable decorative unit 321 so that it can be detected whether the moving area of the movable decorative unit 321 has a player's hand or face. When a hand, a face, or the like is detected, safety can be improved by delaying the movement of the movable decorative unit 321 until the effect is stopped or is not detected.

  Next, at least a part of the movable decoration unit 321 descends to an effect position that overlaps the display unit 11a in front view. Thereafter, since it is difficult to perform a tap operation at a point that overlaps with the movable decoration unit 321, a notification that prompts the user to perform a long tap operation on a desired point other than the point that overlaps with the movable decoration unit 321 is performed.

  When the player performs a long tap operation with a finger on a desired point on the display unit 11a, a black spider image 354 (see FIG. 140) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates. Then, the black eyelid image 354 proceeds so as to extend toward the movable decorative unit 321 at the effect position, and reaches the movable decorative unit 321 and disappears. The movable decoration unit 321 is lit with a dim light emission pattern in accordance with the timing at which the black glaze image 354 disappears.

  As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the black eyelid image 354 was sucked into the movable decorative unit 321. The angle at which the black eyelid image 354 moves is calculated using the center coordinates of the movable decorative unit 321 at the effect position as the goal coordinates. The method for determining the angle is as described above except that the goal coordinates are different.

  Then, after the black eyelid image 354 appears to have been sucked into the movable decorative unit 321, the movable decorative unit 321 moves from the effect position to the standby position, and the hand and face are kept away from the moving area. Is displayed on the display unit 11a, and a warning sound for alerting the player is output. Thereafter, the movable decoration unit 321 moves up and is placed at the standby position, and the suction effect ends. In this way, a powerful effect can be achieved by combining the movable accessory effect and the touch panel effect.

  In the second effect pattern, after the tap operation, the movable decorative unit 321 moves (lowers) to the effect position. When the suction effect of the second effect pattern is executed, first, a notification that prompts the user to perform a long tap operation on a desired point is performed. When the player performs a long tap operation with a finger on a desired point on the display unit 11a, a black spider image 354 (see FIG. 140) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates, and the player stays there.

  Next, a warning that the movable decoration unit 321 moves from the standby position to the effect position and that the hand or face should not be brought close to the movement area is displayed on the display unit 11a, and a warning that alerts the player. Sound is output. Thereafter, the movable decoration unit 321 is lowered and placed at the effect position. At this time, if the black haze image 354 is in a position that overlaps with the effect position of the movable decoration unit 321, the black haze image 354 is not overlapped with the effect position so as not to be obstructed by the movable decoration unit 321. Retraction display to move to the position is performed.

  Next, the black haze image 354 advances from the current position toward the movable decoration unit 321 at the production position, reaches the movable decoration unit 321 and disappears. The movable decoration unit 321 is lit with a dim light emission pattern in accordance with the timing at which the black glaze image 354 disappears. After that, after the warning, as in the first effect pattern, the movable decorative unit 321 moves up and is placed at the standby position, and the suction effect ends.

  If the black eyelid image 354 is displayed at a position that is too close to the movable decorative unit 321 at the effect position, the time during which the black eyelid image 354 moves is shortened. Therefore, in the first effect pattern, a predetermined range close to the movable decoration unit 321 at the effect position is set as an area where the tap operation is not detected. In the second effect pattern, the retreat position that is moved during retraction display is set to a position that is a predetermined distance away from the movable decoration unit 321 at the effect position.

  In the third effect pattern, the movable decorative unit 321 vibrates in the standby position by the excitation of the motor. The timing for starting the vibration can be arbitrarily set before the start of the suction effect, at the start of the suction effect, when the tap operation is detected, or when the suction display is performed. For example, the occurrence of the suction effect may be suggested or notified by vibrating before the start of the suction effect. Further, the vibration of the movable decoration unit 321 may be generated when the accumulated “causal value” reaches a predetermined value.

  In the third effect pattern, since there is little risk that the movable decoration unit 321 contacts the finger of the player who is performing the tap operation, it is not necessary to output a warning display or a warning sound before the operation of the movable decoration unit 321. . Further, the third effect pattern (vibration of the movable decorative unit 321) may be combined with the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern.

  The movable decorative unit 321 moves in preparation for the case where the movable decorative unit 321 does not move due to the disengagement of the gear of the drive mechanism or a trouble such as a motor failure. It is desirable to display an insurance image imitating the movable decoration unit 321 according to the operation mode of the movable decoration unit 321 in the area of the display unit 11a corresponding to the movement area and the production position at the timing at the production position.

  By providing the insurance image, even when the movable decorative unit 321 does not move, the player can generally recognize what kind of effect is being performed as the suction effect, and the game can be continued. Moreover, it is good to perform the effect display of a movement and suction (disappearing) also about the image of a black haze, assuming an insurance image. The insurance image may be displayed only when the origin sensor (not shown) of the movable decoration unit 321 detects that the movable decoration unit 321 cannot be moved from the origin position. In other cases, the insurance image is displayed. Also good.

  In addition, it is preferable that the movable decoration unit 321 has a structure in which the movable decoration unit 321 is locked by meshing the gear at the standby position. Thereby, it can prevent that a player moves the movable decoration unit 321 up and down by hand, and it can suppress that a failure occurs in the drive mechanism of the movable decoration unit 321. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable decorative unit 321 from being unexpectedly dropped due to shaking of the housing caused by a game such as pressing of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R or the production buttons 322 (see FIG. 135).

  Further, when the movable decoration unit 321 is returned from the production position to the standby position, the motor of the drive mechanism is rotated more than the number of steps assuming the distance required for movement, and the gear meshing is slightly pushed in. Then, since it locks firmly, it is more preferable.

  As described above, when the movable decoration unit 321 moves, a warning is displayed on the display unit 11a to prevent the hand from being moved close to the moving area. However, on the demonstration screen generated while waiting for a customer (standby), “There is a moving effect of the movable decoration unit 321 during the game”, “Location of the moving area”, “Always before the movement, a warning sound or warning display is displayed. Because it occurs, it is better to display a reminder such as “If there is no warning, you can play with peace of mind”.

  Thereby, a contact accident between the movable decorative unit 321 and the player can be suppressed, and the player can be reminded to see how the movable decorative unit 321 which is also a decorative part moves. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest and increase the game motivation.

  The touch panel may be requested for a predetermined position on the touch panel for calibration of the touch panel (positioning for correctly detecting the touch coordinates) at the time of power recovery or on the menu screen. If the touch position at the time of calibration is also set to a position that avoids the moving area of the movable decorative unit 321, the contact risk can be reduced, and the administrator can perform the touch operation with peace of mind.

(3) Enlargement effect Next, an enlargement effect performed using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. FIG. 148 and FIG. 149 are explanatory diagrams showing an enlargement effect.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an expansion effect that suggests whether or not an internal winning combination advantageous to the player has been won is executed. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it can be arbitrarily set. For example, when it is decided to perform an expansion effect by lottery performed based on an internal winning combination, when a predetermined number of games are consumed, For example, it is possible to win an internal winning combination that is advantageous to a person.

  Examples of the internal winning combination advantageous to the player include a rare winning combination, a bonus winning combination (BB, RB), and the like. The rare role according to the present embodiment includes “strong bell” (winning number “27”), “watermelon” (winning number “34”), “weak cherry” (winning number “35”), “strong cherry” (winning number) Number “36”) and “chance” (winning numbers “38” to “40”) (see FIG. 19). When winning a rare role, it is expected to win CZ (chance zone) and bonus (see FIGS. 50 and 53).

  The expansion effect according to the present invention is not limited to suggesting whether or not an internal winning combination advantageous to the player has been won, and may be various information notified to the player. As an expansion effect according to the present invention, for example, the number of additional games of ART, a mode for shifting, and the like can be cited.

  In the enlargement effect, first, a predetermined notification image 356 is displayed in a predetermined area of the display unit 11a, and a notification that prompts the player to perform a pinch-out operation on the predetermined area of the display unit 11a is performed (see FIG. 148). Examples of the notification that prompts the pinch-out operation include voices output from the speakers 20L and 20R, characters displayed on the display unit 11a, and the like.

  The predetermined notification image 356 before the pinch-out operation is the first size and has high transparency. Therefore, even if the player sees the predetermined notification image 356 before performing the pinch-out operation, the player cannot recognize the content to be notified (an indication of whether or not the player has won an internal winning combination advantageous to the player) or It is hard to do.

  Since the predetermined notification image 356 cannot be recognized or is difficult to recognize, the player may perform a pinch-out operation on any part of the touch sensor module, but it may be unclear. In this case, it is desirable to display an operation position notification image (not shown) different from the predetermined notification image 356 on the display unit 11a so that the region where the operation can be accepted is known.

  As an example, an animation in which a pinch-out operation is performed with a finger can be displayed in a region where the operation can be accepted. In this case, since the position to be operated is known and an appropriate operation mode is known at the same time, the player can easily participate in the effect using the touch sensor module. Further, the character displayed as the notification for prompting the pinch-out operation described above may have a role as an operation position notification image, and may be displayed at a position indicating a region where the operation can be accepted.

  When the player performs a pinch-out operation, the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged to a second size larger than the first size, and the transparency is lowered (see FIG. 149). At this time, the transparency of the predetermined notification image 356 decreases according to the enlargement ratio of the predetermined notification image 356. Therefore, as the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged, the predetermined notification image 356 becomes visible. Note that characters displayed as an operation position notification image and a notification prompting a pinch-out operation are deleted when a pinch-out operation is detected so as not to hinder the visibility of the enlarged display of the predetermined notification image 356. Is preferred.

  As a result, the player can recognize the notified content represented by the predetermined notification image 356. In this embodiment, the character “chance” is displayed when it is suggested that the player has won an internal winning combination advantageous to the player. In addition, when it is suggested that the player has not won an internal winning combination advantageous to the player, the word “sorry” is displayed (not shown).

  It should be noted that when the characters such as “chance” and “sorry” are large enough to be visually recognized, or when the characters are enlarged to the maximum enlargement ratio, an effect (sound output, decoration lamp emission, image display) can be used as an indication of completion of the operation. Etc.). Thereby, it is possible to clearly recognize the opportunity for the player to end the operation. If the production is based on the displayed text content, such as an image or sound that increases the expectation if it is a “chance”, or an image or sound that seems to be lost if it is a “sorry”, the production effect can be further enhanced. .

  If the player performs a pinch-in operation after the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged to the second size or while the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged to the second size, the predetermined notification image 356 is displayed. Is reduced to the first size and the transparency is increased.

  As described above, in the enlargement effect, the size and transparency of the predetermined notification image 356 change based on the touch input information by the pinch-out operation and the pinch-in operation. Thereby, the predetermined notification image 356 can be recognized or can not be recognized, and the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module can be improved.

  It should be noted that the operation acceptance period may be terminated when the image is enlarged to a sufficiently visible size or the maximum enlargement ratio, and subsequent operations may not be accepted. In addition, the operation reception period may end when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the production. In order to notify the player that the operation reception has ended, the image prompting the operation and the operation position notification image are deleted at the end of the operation reception period. Is desirable.

  When the predetermined notification image 356 of the first size is displayed and the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135) is pressed and held, the predetermined notification image 356 is similar to the case where the pinch-out operation is performed. It is enlarged to the second size and the transparency is lowered. Thereby, the player can enjoy the effect using a touch sensor module, without operating the touch input part 331a.

  When the effect button 322 is pressed and held, only enlargement display (zoom-in) by the pinch-out operation is executed, and reduction display (zoom-out) by the pinch-in operation is not executed. For example, when a pinch-out operation of the touch input unit 331a is performed, there is a possibility that a pinch-in operation is detected and the predetermined notification image 356 is reduced by making an operation mistake while the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged. However, when long-pressing the effect button 322, only the enlarged display by the pinch-out operation is executed, so that the predetermined notification image 356 can be reliably enlarged to the second size.

  In the present embodiment, the size and transparency of the predetermined notification image 356 are changed based on touch input information by a pinch-out operation and a pinch-in operation. However, as an effect using the touch sensor module according to the present invention, only the transparency of the predetermined notification image may be changed based on touch input information by a pinch-out operation and a pinch-in operation.

  In the transparency changing effect that changes only the transparency of the predetermined notification image, first, the predetermined notification image is displayed in a predetermined region of the display unit 11a, and the player drags in the first direction on the predetermined region of the display unit 11a. A notification that prompts the operation is performed. The predetermined notification image before the drag operation in the first direction has high transparency. Therefore, even if the player sees the predetermined notification image before performing the drag operation in the first direction, the player cannot recognize the notification content (suggestion of whether or not an internal winning combination advantageous to the player has been won). Or it is difficult to recognize.

  When the player performs a drag operation in the first direction, the size of the predetermined notification image does not change and the transparency is lowered. At this time, the transparency of the predetermined notification image decreases according to the distance of the drag operation. Therefore, the predetermined notification image becomes visible as the drag operation is continued. As a result, the player can recognize the notified content represented by the predetermined notification image.

  When the player performs a drag operation in the second direction, which is opposite to the first direction, after the transparency of the predetermined notification image is the lowest or while the transparency of the predetermined notification image is low. The transparency of the predetermined notification image is increased, and the state returns to the initial unrecognizable state. As described above, it is possible to make the predetermined notification image recognizable or unrecognizable in the transparency change effect, and to improve the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module.

  Also, in the transparency change effect, if the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135) is pressed and held, the transparency of the predetermined notification image is lowered as in the case where the drag operation in the first direction is performed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the effect using a touch sensor module, without operating the touch input part 331a.

  In the present embodiment, touch input information for enlarging and reducing the predetermined notification image 356 by a pinch-out operation and a pinch-in operation is obtained. However, as an enlargement effect according to the present invention, touch input information for enlarging or reducing the predetermined notification image 356 by other operations on the touch input unit 331a, for example, a drag operation, a long tap operation, a tap operation, or a double tap operation is obtained. May be.

  In the transparency changing effect, touch input information for changing the transparency of the predetermined notification image by a drag operation is obtained. However, as the transparency changing effect according to the present invention, other operations on the touch input unit 331a such as a pinch-out operation, a pinch-in operation, a long tap operation, a tap operation, and a touch operation that changes the transparency of a predetermined notification image by a double tap operation. Input information may be obtained.

  Further, as an expansion effect according to the present invention, an indicator or magnification indicating whether the image is being enlarged or reduced may be displayed. Further, as the transparency changing effect according to the present invention, an indicator or percentage indicating transparency may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the enlargement / reduction of the predetermined notification image 356 has been described. However, the background image (not shown) may be changed according to the enlargement ratio of the predetermined notification image, and this effect is accompanied. This increases the presence of expansion. For example, using the predetermined notification image 356 as a character, the background image may be a ship floating on the river. In this case, by performing a pinch-out operation on the deck portion of the ship, the predetermined notification image 356 is enlarged, and a character on the ship can be discriminated.

  Here, the background image is zoomed as the character is enlarged. Specifically, animation data that changes from reduction to enlargement is held, and a seek value (a setting value indicating which frame is displayed) may be set according to the enlargement ratio. Before the operation, it was a picture that overlooked the entire ship, but after the enlargement operation, the background image enlarged around the deck part and the character with increased visibility are combined, so the predetermined notification image on the ship deck This is a picture of standing character. Further, a character different from the character corresponding to the loss or the character corresponding to the chance may be provided, and the expectation may be suggested by a pose of a specific character.

(4) Notification BGM Selection Effect Next, the notification BGM selection effect performed using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing a notification BGM selection effect using the touch input unit 331a.

  In the present embodiment, three notification effects are provided for notifying the lottery result of the ART lottery processing during BB during BB. A period during BB, that is, a period from when BB starts to when it ends, shows one specific example of the special period according to the present invention. Note that the special period according to the present invention is not limited as long as it extends over a plurality of games, and may be, for example, during the above-described CZ (period from the start of CZ to the end).

  In the present embodiment, a chance notification effect, a complete notification effect, and a post notification effect are provided as three notification effects. The chance announcement effect is an effect that displays a video suggesting that the player has won the ART on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. The chance announcement is a case where the player wins the ART and a case where the user does not win the ART, and the chance is determined by lottery. This is performed when a notice effect is determined.

  As the chance announcement effect, the above-described “reverse-pressed navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” (see FIG. 104) is employed. The case where the chance announcement effect is determined by lottery refers to the case where “gase reverse pressing win” is determined by the above-mentioned reverse reverse pressing lottery (see S569).

  The complete notification effect is an effect of displaying an image that definitely notifies that the player has won the ART on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and is performed only when the player has won the ART. The post notification effect is performed in the last game (game) of the BB. This post notification effect is an effect of displaying on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 an image for notifying whether or not the ART has been won during BB. The state suggestion touch effect described above may be performed during the BB when the post notification effect is selected.

  In addition, when winning ART, when the chance announcement effect is determined by lottery, and when it is the last game of BB, it is a specific example when the specific condition according to the present invention is satisfied. In addition, when the specific condition according to the present invention is satisfied, it can be arbitrarily set. For example, when a predetermined number of games are exhausted, or one or more predetermined internal determination winning combinations are won. And the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, three BGMs (Background Music) that can be output during BB, that is, BGM1, BGM2, and BGM3 are provided. BGM1 to BGM3 show specific examples of sound effects according to the present invention. Each BGM is associated with a video. Accordingly, during BB, an image corresponding to the type of the selected BGM is displayed on the display unit 11a.

  In this embodiment, an announcement BGM selection effect is performed before starting BB. In the notification BGM selection effect, as shown in FIG. 150, the notification BGM selection screen is displayed on the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. A notification effect selection image 361, a BGM selection image 362, a demo video 363, and a START image 364 are displayed on the notification BGM selection screen. The BGM selection image 362 shows a specific example of the sound effect selection image according to the present invention.

  In the notification effect selection image 361, a chance notification selection area 361a in which characters “chance notification” are displayed, a complete notification selection area 361b in which characters “complete notification” are displayed, and characters “post notification” are displayed. And a post notification selection area 361c. Among the selection areas 361a to 361c, the color of the selection area that is most recently tapped (or long tapped) changes. As a result, the player can recognize the currently selected area.

  The BGM selection image 362 is provided with a BGM1 selection area 362a provided with letters and numbers “BGM1”, a BGM2 selection area 362b provided with letters and numbers “BGM2”, and letters and numbers “BGM3”. And a BGM3 selection area 361c. Among the selection areas 362a to 362c, the color of the selection area that is most recently tapped is changed. As a result, the player can recognize the currently selected area.

  The demonstration video 363 displays a video corresponding to the selected BGM type. The video corresponding to the type of BGM is displayed on the entire display unit 11a when the BB is started. The START image 364 corresponds to a determination button. The combination of the notification effect type and the BGM type is determined by tapping the START image 364 after selecting the notification effect type and the BGM type.

  In the notification BGM selection effect, when the player performs a tap operation on the chance notification selection area 361a of the notification effect selection image 361, the color of the chance notification selection area 361a changes and the chance notification effect is selected. Next, when the player performs a tap operation on the BGM1 selection area 362a of the BGM selection image 362, the color of the BGM1 selection area 362a changes and BGM1 is selected. When the player performs a tap operation on the START image 364, a combination of the chance notification effect and BGM1 is determined as an effect performed during BB.

  When the BB for which the combination of the chance announcement effect and BGM1 is determined is started, the speakers 20L and 20R normally output BGM1 and the display unit 11a displays an image corresponding to the BGM1. When it is determined that the chance notification effect is to be performed, the display unit 11a interrupts the display of the video corresponding to the BGM1, and the video corresponding to the chance notification effect (“reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)” ) Is displayed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the complete notification effect is performed in the BB in which the complete notification effect is selected as the type of the notification effect (ART wins), the display unit 11a displays the video corresponding to the selected BGM type. Is interrupted and the video corresponding to the complete notification effect is displayed. The video corresponding to the complete notification effect may be the same as the video corresponding to the chance notification effect (“reverse-pushing navigation (navigating to the white BAR)”).

  Further, in the BB in which the post notification effect is selected as the type of the notification effect, the BGM in which the speakers 20L and 20R are selected is output, and the display unit 11a displays a video corresponding to the selected BGM type. And the display part 11a displays the image | video according to the notification effect in the last game of BB. Thereafter, in the video corresponding to the notification effect, whether or not the ART is won is notified during the BB.

  As described above, in the notification BGM selection effect, the type of notification effect and the type of BGM (sound effect) can be selected. As a result, it is possible to play a game during the BB (specific period) by combining a desired notification effect type and a desired BGM type, and the variation of the effect can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In conventional gaming machines, BGM (sound production) corresponding to the type of notification production is determined. For this reason, when a favorite notification effect is selected, there is a case where a favorite BGM cannot be output. However, in the notification BGM selection effect of the present embodiment, the favorite notification effect and the favorite BGM can be combined.

  Also, in the notification BGM selection effect, by selecting a predetermined notification effect in a plurality of BBs and changing the type of BGM, it is possible to enjoy the BGM output regardless of the notification method (game characteristics). . Contrary to this, in a plurality of BBs, by always selecting a predetermined BGM and changing the type of notification effect, the user can enjoy the notification method (game characteristics) regardless of the output BGM (music). Can do.

  In the notification BGM selection effect, the notification effect selection image 361 and the BGM selection image 362 are simultaneously displayed on the notification BGM selection screen. The type of notification effect and the type of BGM (sound effect) can be selected by operating the touch input unit 331a. As a result, it is possible to easily perform an effect selection operation, and it is possible for the player to easily grasp the selected items.

  As described above, during BB, the video displayed on the display unit 11a is determined according to the type of the selected BGM, but the video displayed on the display unit 11a according to the type of the selected notification effect. May be determined. When the video is determined according to the type of notification effect, the display content of the demonstration video 363 is determined according to the type of notification effect selected at that time. In the case of determining a video according to the type of BGM, the interest of production is enhanced by increasing the sense of unity between the BGM and the video. In addition, when the video is determined according to the type of the notification effect, displaying the video related to the notification effect has an effect of increasing the player's interest in the notification effect.

  151 and 152 are explanatory diagrams showing a modification of the notification BGM selection effect using the touch input unit 331a.

  In the modified example of the notification BGM selection effect, a screen switching mark 365 is displayed on the notification BGM selection screen when a special condition is satisfied (see FIG. 151). As a special condition, it can be set arbitrarily. For example, when a certain period of time has elapsed since the introduction of a gaming machine, or when a uni-memo has been started, a predetermined number of bonuses have been won. Cases can be mentioned.

  When the player performs a tap operation on the screen switching mark 365, the notification BGM selection screen is switched. The switched notification BGM selection screen is hereinafter referred to as a “second notification BGM selection screen”. As shown in FIG. 152, the second notification BGM selection screen includes a notification effect selection image 361, a BGM selection image 366, a demo video 363, a START image 364, a random START image 367, and a screen switching mark 368. It is displayed. The BGM selection image 366 shows a specific example of the sound effect selection image according to the present invention.

  The BGM selection image 366 is provided with a BGM4 selection area 366a provided with letters and numbers “BGM4”, a BGM5 selection area 366b provided with letters and numbers “BGM5”, and a symbol “???”. And a non-selection region 366c. That is, when a special condition is satisfied, the types of BGM that can be selected increase.

  Of the selection areas 366a and 366b, the color of the selection area most recently tapped is changed. As a result, the player can recognize the currently selected area. Note that the non-selected area 366c is not selected even if a tap operation is performed. This non-selected area 366c will be changed to an area where the type of BGM can be selected when further conditions are satisfied in the future.

  The random START image 367 is operated when a notification effect type and a BGM type are randomly selected and determined. That is, it is used when the player does not select the type of notification effect and the type of BGM. The screen switching mark 368 is used when the second notification BGM selection screen (see 152) is switched to the notification BGM selection screen (see FIG. 151).

  In this modification, screen switching marks 365 and 368 are provided on the notification BGM selection screen and the second notification BGM selection screen. However, the switching between the notification BGM selection screen and the second notification BGM selection screen according to the present invention may be performed by a flick operation.

  In the present embodiment, a chance notification effect, a complete notification effect, and a post notification effect are provided as types of notification effects. However, the notification effect according to the present invention can be arbitrarily set. Further, the number of announcement effects may be two or more. In the present embodiment, BGM1, BGM2, and BGM3 are provided as types of BGM (sound production). However, the sound effect according to the present invention is not limited to BGM, and may be an effect of outputting a speech, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the type of notification effect and the type of BGM are selected on the same screen, but not limited to the notification effect, the type of effect type and the type of BGM (sound effect) are selected. Also good. For example, as the type of production type, “HIGH” where the production frequency is high and the low expectation production frequently occurs, “MIDDLE” where the production frequency is medium and the production is selected with a standard balance, and the production frequency is low. In the event of occurrence, “LOW” that increases the expectation of winning such as a bonus can be cited. Thus, the type of effect type may be set based on the effect frequency.

  In addition, as the types of production types (production modes), the following six types (first to sixth production modes) may be used. The first effect mode mainly consists of one game completion effect. In the second effect mode, a chance combination that causes a missed event is completely notified, and, in the case of other than the chance combination, the player's appearance frequency is reduced by an effect rule that no effect occurs. The third production mode is surely developed into a continuous production with a chance role, but there is a law in the correspondence between the role and the development destination, and if the rule breaks, the expectation of winning such as a bonus increases.

  In the fourth effect mode, the third effect mode is shifted from the first effect mode to the third effect mode as a so-called stage, and a unique stage having a higher winning expectation such as a bonus is provided. In the fifth effect mode, when the chance combination is established, an effect of quantifying the winning expectation degree such as a bonus is performed. In the sixth effect mode, the display unit 11a does not perform any suggestion effect, and notifies the bonus winning or the like only with the decorative lamp and notification sound on the front door.

  It should be noted that character type selection may be used instead of BGM type selection. By selecting a character, the voice of push order navigation etc. during AT becomes that of the character, BGM becomes the theme song of the corresponding character, and the character appears or is related to the background during normal times or bonus The video to be played will flow. In this case, not only BGM and voice but also the appearance of the overall production specification including the video is selected on the basis of the character, and the player can strongly impress the player with the image of the work related to the character.

  Here, when items that can be selected are arranged, the present invention provides a first selection for selecting a type of effect type for information related to acquisition of a game value such as an announcement and a suggestion effect, and for games such as BGM and characters. It can be said that the second selection for selecting the production type for information not related to value acquisition is selected on the same screen. This makes it easier for the player to grasp various production variations, makes it easier to select production, and enhances the interest of the game.

  Further, the type of notification effect may be selected on the same screen as the first selection and the type of video as the second selection. The BGM in this case may not particularly change depending on the selected item, and may be determined based on the type of notification effect or the type of video. As a further modification, the selection of two items may be an effect type for information not related to the acquisition of game value.

  Also, the first selection item can be selected on the same screen as the BGM type and the second selection item as the video type. In this case, the production type for the information related to the provision of the game value may not be changed depending on the selected item, and may be determined based on the BGM type or the video type. Good.

  In addition, although the case where the number of selection items was two was demonstrated so far, if the determination of several production types can be performed smoothly by determining a plurality of productions at the same timing, the number of selection items Is not limited to two. For example, the types relating to the three items “notification effect”, “BGM”, and “video” may be selectable, or more selection items may be selectable on the same screen.

  In the present embodiment, an image related to the notification BGM selection effect is displayed on the entire surface of the display unit 11a. However, the image related to the selection effect according to the present invention is displayed on a part of the display unit 11a, and an effect (video) corresponding to the game state is displayed on the other part of the display unit 11a, so that the player can play the game. While enjoying the production according to the state, the production may be selected. In this case, when the selection of the effect is completed, the effect display is appropriately changed. In addition, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of display devices such as so-called sub liquid crystal screens, an image related to a selection effect is displayed on an arbitrary display device, and an effect (video) corresponding to a game state is displayed on another display device. Also good.

  Note that the volume adjustment, the brightness adjustment of the decorative lamp of the housing, the brightness adjustment of the display, etc. may be set in accordance with the selection. In this way, it is possible to perform a comfortable game by collectively setting a gaming environment desired by the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, since an intuitive operation is possible, a selection operation is accepted by the touch input unit 331a. However, the up / down / left / right direction input by the start lever 16, an effect button 322, and a MAX bet button 14 are accepted. The selection operation may be accepted by other operation means such as.

  Also, in this embodiment, before starting the BB, the effect during the BB and the type of BGM are selected. However, it is possible to select the effect, the type of the BGM, etc. Selection may be made possible on a menu screen that can be displayed at any timing (except during continuous production). In this case, the specific period in which the selected production status is reflected may be from the selection until the predetermined number of games or the next bonus or the like.

  In addition, you may use notification BGM selection effect of this embodiment for round number announcement effect selection in the jackpot of a pachinko game machine. In this case, a notice selection effect is performed in a waiting state for passing through a combination gate, which is one of the jackpot start conditions, the jackpot start interval, and the first round of jackpot start to a predetermined round. The content of the announcement here is “full announcement” that immediately announces the number of rounds of jackpots immediately, “post-announcement” that announces the end or continuation of the jackpot at the time of digestion of the announced round or the interval between rounds, Depending on whether the performance of each round is successful or unsuccessful, it can be a “chance announcement” that appears to have increased the number of remaining rounds, such as adding pachislot.

  In addition, it is possible to select a notification effect as to whether or not to continue holding in the case of a jackpot holding pre-reading, or a notification effect selection as to whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state such as a probable change, a short time, or a small hit frequent occurrence state after a big hit. . Further, the announcement BGM selection effect may be performed during the jackpot or during the jackpot end interval so that the effect mode and the BGM during the probability change or the short time can be selected.

  Also, in the case of specifications that change the selection pattern of the fluctuation time triggered by a predetermined number of fluctuations after jackpots, such as during a short period of time or during a probable change, the BGM of the predetermined number of times is set to a long time value, and the notification BGM selection is made with the fluctuation. It may be done. By doing in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by giving a new stimulus to the player whose interest is not easily lost in the advantageous gaming state and whose interest is decreasing.

  Also, it is possible to select the production type and BGM at the same time by the announcement BGM selection effect at the time of a small hit or at a normal time (for example, at the stage change), not only at the time of big hit, but while waiting for customers (standby) Even if it is performed on a menu screen that can be displayed by an operation such as a production button, there is an effect of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game.

(5) Expansion Effect Next, an expansion effect performed using the touch input unit 331a will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing an expansion effect using the touch input unit 331a.

  In the present embodiment, in the extra lottery process during ART (see S583 in FIG. 105), when the number of additional games for ART is determined, an expansion effect using the touch input unit 31a is executed, and the determined additional game is determined. Inform the number.

  In the extra lottery process, when the number of additional games of ART is determined, an expansion target image 371 is displayed on the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, as shown in FIG. The expansion target image 371 is displayed in the center of the display unit 11a and is formed in a quadrangle.

  In the present embodiment, the screen resolution of the display unit 11a is set to 1280 × 720 pixels. Therefore, the upper left corner of the display unit 11a is set as coordinates (0, 0), and the lower right corner is set as coordinates (1280, 720). The center of the expansion target image 371 coincides with the coordinates (650, 305) of the display unit 11a, and the horizontal width is set to 400 pixels and the vertical width is set to 450 pixels.

  In the expansion effect, the expansion target image 371 is expanded by performing a drag operation (swipe operation) on the touch input unit 331a. The expansion target image 371 has a different expansion rate depending on the value of the number of additional games of ART. That is, the expansion target image 371 expands as the value of the number of additional games on ART increases.

  FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an input determination area for an expansion effect using the touch input unit 331a. Input determination areas 373 and 374 for expanding the expansion target image 371 are set at the left and right ends of the expansion target image 371. The input determination area 373 is set to a range of 50 pixels left and right across the left end of the expansion target image 371. The input determination area 374 is set to a range of 50 pixels on the left and right with the right end of the expansion target image 371 interposed therebetween. Accordingly, the horizontal widths of the input determination areas 373 and 374 are each set to 100 pixels.

  FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where the expansion target image 371 is expanded. As shown in FIG. 155, in the present embodiment, the expansion target image 371 is expanded (expanded) in the horizontal direction by performing a drag operation with a finger in contact with one or both of the input determination areas 373 and 374.

  When the player touches the input determination area 373 with a finger and performs a drag operation in the left direction, the expansion target image 371 expands so as to spread in the left direction. At this time, the right end of the expansion target image 371 does not move, the lateral width of the expansion target image 371 increases, and the center of the expansion target image 371 is displaced leftward. The input determination area 373 moves together with the left end of the expansion target image 371. It should be noted that the size of the expansion target image 371 does not change even when the player performs a drag operation in the right direction while bringing the finger into contact with the input determination area 373.

  On the other hand, when the player touches the input determination area 374 with a finger and performs a drag operation in the right direction, the expansion target image 371 expands so as to expand in the right direction. At this time, the left end of the expansion target image 371 does not move, the lateral width of the expansion target image 371 increases, and the center of the expansion target image 371 is displaced in the right direction. The input determination area 374 moves together with the right end of the expansion target image 371. It should be noted that the size of the expansion target image 371 does not change even if the player performs a drag operation in the left direction by bringing the finger into contact with the input determination area 374.

  When the player touches the input determination areas 373 and 374 with his / her finger and performs a drag operation to the left with the finger in contact with the input determination area 373 and to the right with the finger in contact with the input determination area 374, The expansion target image 371 expands so as to spread in the left-right direction. At this time, the lateral width of the expansion target image 371 is increased, and the center of the expansion target image 371 is displaced in the long direction of the drag operation. When the drag operation has the same length, the center of the expansion target image 371 is not displaced.

FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the left side to the limit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which expanded the expansion object image 371 on the right side with the limit eye.
In the present embodiment, limit positions at both ends of the expansion target image 371 when the expansion target image 371 is expanded are set.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the limit position of the left end of the expansion target image 371 when the expansion target image 371 is expanded leftward is set to coordinates (100, y) (y = 80 to 530). When the expansion target image 371 is expanded only to the left side to the limit, the center of the expansion target image 371 coincides with the coordinates (475, 305).

  As shown in FIG. 157, the limit position of the right end of the expansion target image 371 when the expansion target image 371 is expanded rightward is set to coordinates (1200, y) (y = 80 to 530). When the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the limit only on the right side, the center of the expansion target image 371 coincides with the coordinates (825, 305).

  When the expansion target image 371 expands to a size corresponding to the value of the additional game number of ART, the value of the additional game number is displayed superimposed on the expansion target image 371. When the value of the added game number is not displayed superimposed on the expansion target image 371, the expansion target image 371 can be further expanded.

  When the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the limit on the left side and then the expansion target image 371 is further expanded, a finger is brought into contact with the input determination area 374 and a drag operation is performed in the right direction. In addition, after the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the limit on the right side, when the expansion target image 371 is further expanded, a finger is brought into contact with the input determination area 373 and a drag operation is performed in the left direction. Thereby, the expansion target image 371 can be further expanded.

  FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 and the number of additional games of ART. FIG. 159 is a graph showing the relationship between the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 and the number of additional games of ART.

  As described above, the expansion target image 371 has a different expansion rate depending on the value of the number of additional games of ART. As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, in this embodiment, as the number of additional games of ART, no additional (0G (game)), 5G, 10G, 20G, 30G, 50G, 70G, 100G, and 200G are set. Yes. On the other hand, the width (region) in which the expansion target image 371 can expand is divided into a first section to an eighth section.

  In the case of no addition (0G (game)), the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 50 pixels. Therefore, when there is no extra (0G (game)), the expansion target image 371 does not expand.

  The width of the first section is set to 50 pixels. When the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the first section and the second section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 50 pixels. When the number of games added to ART is 5G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 50 pixels.

  The width of the second section is set to 50 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the second section and the third section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 100 pixels. When the number of games added to ART is 10G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 100 pixels.

  The width of the third section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the third section and the fourth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 200 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 20G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 200 pixels.

  The width of the fourth section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the fourth section and the fifth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 300 pixels. When the number of games added to ART is 30G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 300 pixels.

  The width of the fifth section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the fifth section and the sixth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 400 pixels. When the number of games added to ART is 50G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 400 pixels.

  The width of the sixth section is set to 100 pixels, and when the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the sixth section and the seventh section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 500 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 70G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 500 pixels.

  The width of the seventh section is set to 100 pixels. When the expansion target image 371 expands to the boundary between the seventh section and the eighth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 600 pixels. When the number of additional games of ART is 100G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 600 pixels.

  The width of the eighth section is set to 100 pixels. When the expansion target image 371 is expanded to the maximum of the eighth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 becomes 700 pixels. When the number of games added to ART is 200 G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 700 pixels.

  When the expansion target image 371 expands to the determined expansion width, the determined number of additional games of ART is displayed so as to overlap the expansion target image 371. However, as the expansion appearance according to the present invention, a display in which the number of games added to the ART is counted up according to the expansion of the expansion target image 371 may be displayed so as to overlap the expansion target image 371.

  In this way, the rate of increase of the number of games added to the ART with respect to the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 in each section is set separately. In other words, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 necessary for increasing the number of additional games of ART by 1G is different in the first to eighth sections.

  In the first section to the fourth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 necessary for increasing the added game number by 1G is 10 pixels. Further, in the fifth section and the sixth section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 necessary for increasing the added game number by 1G is 5 pixels. In the seventh section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 necessary for increasing the added game number by 1G is 10/3 pixels. In the seventh section, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 necessary for increasing the added game number by 1G is 1 pixel.

  As a result, when the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 increases, the rate of increase of the upper number of ARTs increases. As a result, even if the number of riders is small, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 can be appropriately secured, and the gameability of expanding the expansion target image 371 can be enjoyed.

  In the expansion effect, the expansion width (expansion rate) of the expansion target image 371 differs depending on the value of the ART addition game number (privilege size). Can be expressed visually. Thereby, the visual effect of the alerting | reporting effect using the display part 11a can be improved, and the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the privilege given to the player to be notified in the expansion effect is the number of games added to the ART. However, the privilege given to the player to be notified in the expansion effect is not limited to the number of additional games of ART, for example, winning or transition of each gaming state (BB, RB, CZ, ART), predetermined It may be the number of game media to be paid out or obtained during this period.

  When notifying the winning or transition of each gaming state (BB, RB, CZ, ART), the expansion width (expansion rate) of the expansion target image is varied according to the type of privilege to be notified. In this case, the expansion width (expansion rate) is preferably increased in an order that is advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the expansion appearance is started and the expansion target image 371 is displayed on the display unit 11a, the expansion appearance is executed even if the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135) is pressed. Is notified. Examples of the notification include voices output from the speakers 20L and 20R, characters displayed on the display unit 11a, and the like.

  In the expansion effect, when the player presses the effect button 322, if the determined number of additional games is not added (0G (game)), the expansion target image 371 extends in both the left and right directions. Inflates. That is, when the production button 322 is pressed, the same operation is performed as when the drag operation is performed leftward with the finger touching the input determination area 373 and rightward with the finger touching the input determination area 374. become. If the operation of the touch input unit 331a and the operation of the effect button 322 are performed at that time, the operation of the effect button 322 is given priority.

  Thereby, the player can enjoy the effect using a touch sensor module, without operating the touch input part 331a. In order to simultaneously expand the expansion target image 371 in the left-right direction, an operation with both hands is required. However, the long press of the effect button 322 (see FIG. 135) can be performed with one hand, so that the expansion effect can be rapidly advanced even when one hand is blocked.

  In the expansion effect of the present embodiment, the expansion target image 371 is expanded in accordance with an operation performed by the player. However, as the expansion effect according to the present invention, the player is not required to operate, the expansion target image is expanded during a predetermined period, and the size or type of the privilege given to the player is notified. It may be a thing.

  Even in this case, the expansion rate of the expansion target image is varied according to the size or type of the privilege given to the player. Thereby, the magnitude | size or kind of privilege provided to the player can be expressed visually. As a result, the visual effect of the notification effect using the display unit can be enhanced, and the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  In the expansion effect of the present embodiment, the expansion target image 371 is expanded in the left-right direction by bringing a finger into contact with the input determination areas 373 and 374 and performing a drag operation in the left-right direction. However, as an expansion effect according to the present invention, the expansion target image may be expanded in the vertical direction by performing a drag operation in the vertical direction. Further, as an expansion effect according to the present invention, the expansion target image may be expanded in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by performing an oblique drag operation.

  Further, in the expansion effect of the present embodiment, the number of additional games to be notified for each section is set for each section. However, as an expansion effect according to the present invention, a plurality of additional ART games to be notified may be set for each section. For example, when the expansion target image expands into the first section, one of 1 to 5G may be notified as the number of additional games of ART.

  Also in this case, the expansion rate is varied according to the value of the number of games added to ART. That is, when the ART addition game number is 1G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 10 pixels, and when the ART addition game number is 2G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is 20 pixels. To be determined. Further, when the number of additional games of ART is 3G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 30 pixels, and when the number of additional games of ART is 4G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is 40 pixels. To be determined. When the number of games added to ART is 5G, the expansion width of the expansion target image 371 is determined to be 50 pixels.

  In the expansion effect of the present embodiment, when the effect button 322 is pressed during the expansion appearance, the expansion target image 371 expands so as to spread in both the left and right directions. However, as an expansion effect according to the present invention, the effect button 322 may be kept pressed until the expansion of the expansion target image 371 ends.

(6) Scratch effect Next, the scratch effect performed using the touch input part 331a is demonstrated with reference to FIGS. 160-166. FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility reduction efficiency centered on the touch coordinates related to the scratch effect using the touch input unit 331a.

  In the present embodiment, in the CZ lottery (see FIG. 50), whether or not the winning of CZ (CZ1 and CZ2) is determined is notified by a scratch effect using the touch input unit 31a. In the scratch effect, the shield image 381 is displayed on the display unit 11a. The color of the shielding image 381 can be set as appropriate, but can be set to silver, for example. Thereby, the shield image 381 can be made to look like silver scratch printing used for a whale or the like.

  When the player rubs the area where the shield image 381 is displayed with his / her finger (performs a drag operation), the portion of the shield image 381 rubbed with the finger becomes a reduced visibility mode (disappears). Then, display is performed such that a part of the image such as letters, numbers, figures, designs, and the like can be seen from the part that has become a reduced visibility mode. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that a silver scratch used for a lottery or the like is being scraped off and to enhance the interest of the production.

  A region (hereinafter referred to as “visually-reducible region”) 382 that can be changed to a visual degradation mode when touched by a player's finger is set to a circle with a predetermined radius centered on the detected touch coordinates. ing. This visually-reducible area 382 includes a first area 382a, a second area 382b, and a third area 382c.

  As shown in FIG. 160, the first region 382a is formed in a circular shape including touch coordinates. The second region 382b is formed in a ring shape surrounding the first region 382a, and is farther from the touch coordinates than the first region 382a. The third area is formed in a ring shape surrounding the second area 382b, and is farther from the touch coordinates than the second area 382b.

  The first area 382a has a higher efficiency (hereinafter referred to as “visibility reduction efficiency”) for reducing the visibility of the shielded image 381 than the second area 382b. In addition, the second region 382b has a higher efficiency in reducing the visibility of the shielded image 381 than the third region 382c. In other words, the closer to the touch coordinates, the easier it is to change the occlusion image 381 to the visual degradation mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the realism of the effect of scraping off the scratch and to improve the interest of the scratch effect.

  The first region 382a according to the present embodiment subtracts 64 from the alpha value. The second area 382b subtracts 48 from the alpha value, and the third area 382c subtracts 32 from the alpha value. The alpha value is a numerical value representing transparency, and is set to 0-255. When the alpha value is 255, it is opaque, the transparency increases as the alpha value decreases, and when the alpha value is 0, it becomes completely transparent.

  In the present embodiment, in the scratch effect, the visually-reducible area 382 is changed to the visually-reducible area 383 by performing a pinch-out operation in an area other than the area where the shield image 381 is displayed.

FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the visibility reduction efficiency related to the scratch effect.
As shown in FIG. 161, the visually reducible region 383 is formed in a circular shape having the same area as the visually reducible region 382, and includes a first region 383a, a second region 383b, and a third region 383c. Yes.

  The area of the first region 383a is larger than the first region 382a of the visually-reducible region 382. The area of the second region 383b is smaller than the second region 382b of the visually reducible region 382, and the area of the third region 383c is smaller than the third region 382c of the visually reducible region 382. Therefore, the area where visibility can be reduced 383 has a larger area of the visibility reduction efficiency (first area 383a) than the area where visibility can be reduced 382, and can easily be changed to a visibility reduction mode.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 77 (see FIG. 7) controls the liquid crystal display device 11 to change the visually-reducible area 382 to the visually-reducible area 383. That is, the sub control board 77 shows a specific example of the touch mode management means according to the present invention.

  The sub-control board 77 changes the visually-reducible area 382 to the visually-reducible area 383 by managing the touch mode. Specifically, the sub-control board 77 sets the visually-reducible area 382 when the touch mode is the first touch mode. On the other hand, when the touch mode is the second touch mode, it is set in the visually-reducible area 383.

  When the scratch effect is started, the sub control board 77 sets the touch mode to the first touch mode. And the area | region which can be changed to a visual recognition fall mode by a player's finger | toe touching is set to the visual recognition fallable area 382. On the other hand, if a pinch-out operation is performed in an area other than the area where the shield image 381 is displayed during the scratch effect, the sub control board 77 sets the touch mode to the second touch mode. And the area | region which can be changed to a visual recognition fall aspect by a player's finger | toe touching is set to the visual recognition fallable area | region 383. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when a pinch-in operation is performed in an area other than the area where the shield image 381 is displayed during the scratch effect, the sub control board 77 sets the touch mode to the first touch mode. And the area | region which can be changed to a visual recognition fall mode by a player's finger | toe touching is set to the visual recognition fallable area 382.

  In this way, in the scratch effect, the visually-reducible area 382 and the visually-reducible area 383 are switched by performing a pinch-out operation and a pinch-out operation. Thereby, visibility reduction efficiency can be changed. In other words, the visibility reduction efficiency can be increased by making the visually-reducible area 383, and the shielded image 381 can be easily changed to a visually-reduced mode. As a result, interest during scratch production can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the visually-reducible area 382 is changed to the visually-reducible area 383 by performing a pinch-out operation. This pinch-out operation shows a specific example of the special operation according to the present invention. Examples of the special operation according to the present invention include other operations on the touch input unit 331a or an effect button 322, and the like. You may employ | adopt operation with respect to operation means other than a touch input part.

162 to 166 are explanatory diagrams showing the flow of the scratch effect.
In the present embodiment, when a special condition is satisfied, a scratch effect that notifies whether or not the winning of CZ (CZ1 and CZ2) has been determined is executed. Examples of cases where special conditions are satisfied include, for example, a case where CZ winning is determined, or a case where CZ winning is not determined and it is determined to perform a scratch effect by lottery. be able to.

  When the scratch effect is started, four shielding images 381a to 381d are displayed on the display unit 11a (see FIG. 162). In addition, notification that prompts the user to rub the four shield images 381a to 381d with a finger (perform a drag operation) is performed. Examples of the notification include voices output from the speakers 20L and 20R, characters displayed on the display unit 11a, and the like.

  When the four occlusion images 381a to 381d are set in a visibility-decreasing mode (disappear), “this” or “x” becomes visible. "T" or "x" indicates a specific example of a predetermined effect image according to the present invention. “To” indicates that CZ has been won, and “X” indicates that CZ has not been won.

  When the CZ is won, basically “hits” are arranged in any of the areas corresponding to the four occluded images 381a to 381d (FIG. 163). Therefore, the player recognizes that “we” is visible and wins CZ by making at least one of the areas where the four occlusion images 381a to 381d are displayed in a reduced visibility mode. can do. In addition, even if it is not possible to make all the four occlusion images 381a to 381d be in a visibility-decreasing mode, the scratch effect is ended when “T” is visible.

  On the other hand, when CZ is not won, “x” is arranged in any of the areas corresponding to the four occlusion images 381a to 381d (FIG. 164). Therefore, the player recognizes that the four “x” can be visually recognized and is not hit by the CZ by making all of the areas where the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed into a reduced visibility mode. can do. When the four “X” s are visible, the scratch effect is basically ended.

  In the present embodiment, there are cases where “x” is arranged in any of the areas corresponding to the four occlusion images 381a to 381d even if the CZ is won. This is determined, for example, when a reverse pattern lottery is performed when CZ is won and a reverse pattern is won. In addition, the CZ winning type of CZ and the CZ winning type of the reverse rotation pattern may be defined as the CZ winning type, and the presence / absence of the reverse rotation pattern and the CZ winning type may be determined in the CZ lottery.

  In the case of CZ winning of the reverse pattern, if all the areas where the four occlusion images 381a to 381d are displayed are set in the visibility-decreasing mode, the image of the point displayed in the center of the display unit 11a (the four occlusion images 381a). (Part of the display that divides ˜381d) is notified to urge the user to perform a pinch-out operation (see FIG. 165).

  The notification that prompts the user to perform a pinch-out operation on the image of the point displayed in the center of the display unit 11a is performed in advance by setting all the areas where the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed to the visibility reduction mode. It is executed when a predetermined period has elapsed. However, the notification that prompts the user to perform the pinch-out operation in the scratch effect can be executed as appropriate, and may be executed on condition that the effect button 322 is pressed, for example.

  When the player performs a pinch-out operation on the dot image displayed in the center of the display unit 11a, the dot image is enlarged and displayed with high transparency. As a result, the “t” provided in the area corresponding to the dot image can be visually recognized (see FIG. 166). As a result, the player can recognize that he / she has won CZ. When “T” becomes visible, the scratch effect ends.

  In the case of CZ winning of the reverse pattern, it is possible to perform a pinch-out operation on the point image at the time when the four shield images 381a to 381d are displayed. Therefore, when the four occlusion images 381a to 381d are displayed, the point image is enlarged and displayed by a pinch-out operation even if the four occlusion images 381a to 381d are not rubbed with a finger (without dragging). Can do.

  In the scratch effect in the case of the CZ win of the reverse pattern, since the pinch out operation is combined, an unexpected effect can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 167 and FIG. 168 are explanatory diagrams showing modifications of the scratch effect.
In the modified example of the scratch effect, the effect when the CZ winning of the reverse rotation pattern is determined is different.

  In the modification example of the scratch effect, if the CZ winning of the reverse rotation pattern is made, if all of the areas where the four shielded images 381a to 381d are displayed are reduced in visibility, the points displayed at the center of the display unit 11a are displayed. Notification that prompts the user to perform a pinch-out operation on the image (part of the display that partitions the four shield images 381a to 381d) is performed (see FIG. 165).

  When the player performs a pinch-out operation on the dot image displayed at the center of the display unit 11a, the dot image is enlarged and displayed, and the shield image 381e is visible (see FIG. 167). Then, when the player rubs the shield image 381e with a finger (performs a drag operation), the area where the shield image 381e is displayed becomes a visibility-decreasing mode, and “this” becomes visible (see FIG. 166). Thereby, the player can recognize that he / she wins CZ. When “T” becomes visible, the scratch effect ends.

  In the present embodiment, when a special condition is satisfied, a scratch effect for notifying whether or not winning of CZ (CZ1 and CZ2) has been determined is executed. Then, whether or not CZ winning is determined is notified by an image of “win” or “x”. However, the scratch effect according to the present invention is not limited to notifying whether or not CZ winning is determined, for example, winning an internal winning combination advantageous to a player, or winning ART In addition, the number of additional games of ART may be notified.

  And the effect image which can be visually recognized when a shielding image is made into a visibility fall mode can employ | adopt various images according to the content to alert | report. For example, when the content to be notified is the number of additional games for ART, a numerical value representing the determined number of additional games is used as the effect image.

(7) Additional notification effect Next, the additional notification effect performed using the display unit 11a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an additional notification effect using the display unit 11a.

  In this embodiment, in the extra lottery process during ART (see S583 in FIG. 105), when the number of additional games for ART is determined, an additional notification effect using the display unit 11a is executed, and the determined additional game is performed. Inform the number.

  In the extra notification effect, first, the determined “number of additional ART games” and “number of remaining ART games” are displayed on the display unit 11a. After that, “the number of remaining ART games after adding” is displayed by adding “the number of additional games to ART” to “the number of remaining ART games”. At this time, a count-up display for increasing the value of “number of remaining ART games” is performed until the “number of remaining ART games” is reached from “number of remaining ART games”.

  The “number of ART additional games” is “+1700” shown in FIG. 169, and shows one specific example of the first value according to the present invention. The “number of remaining ART games” is “remaining 10G” shown in FIG. 169, and shows one specific example of the second value according to the present invention. Further, the “number of remaining ART games after addition” is “remaining 1710G” shown in FIG. 169, and shows one specific example of the total value according to the present invention.

In the count-up display, when “remaining ART game number” is x and “remaining ART additional game number” is y, “remaining ART game number” x ′ after one frame is calculated by Equation 5. To do. The figures after the decimal point are rounded down. In this embodiment, an image of 30 frames is displayed per second.
x ′ = x + (y / 100) (Formula 5)

Further, the “number of remaining ART addition games” y ′ after one frame is calculated by Expression 6. The figures after the decimal point are rounded down.
y ′ = y− (y / 100) (Formula 6)

For example, when “the number of remaining ART games” is 10 and 1700 is determined as the “number of additional ART games”, the “number of remaining ART games” x ′ of the first frame is 27.
x ′ = 10 + (1700/100)
= 27

Also, the “number of remaining ART addition games” y ′ of the first frame is 1683.
y ′ = 1700− (1700/100)
= 1683

The “number of remaining ART games” x ′ of the second frame is 43.
x ′ = 27 + (1683/100)
= 43

Further, the “number of remaining ART addition games” y ′ of the second frame is 1683.
y ′ = 1683- (1683/100)
= 1667

The “number of remaining ART games” x ′ in the third frame is 59.
x ′ = 43 + (1667/100)
= 59

Further, the “number of remaining ART addition games” y ′ of the third frame is 1683.
y ′ = 1667− (1667/100)
= 1651

  When the “number of remaining ART addition games” y is 1600 or more and less than 1700, the variation value added to the “number of remaining ART games” x in one frame is “16” (variation value). = Y / 100). That is, the “number of remaining ART games” x ′ increases by “16” for each frame. When the “number of remaining ART addition games” y is 100 or more and less than 200, the variation value added to the “number of remaining ART games” x in one frame is “1”.

  In addition, when “the number of remaining ART addition games” y is 0 or more and less than 100, the variation added to “the number of remaining ART games” x in one frame is calculated according to the above (Formula 5). The value is “0”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the “number of remaining ART addition games” y is 0 or more and less than 100, the variation value is set to “1”. Accordingly, when the “number of remaining ART addition games” y is less than 200, the “number of remaining ART games” x ′ is increased by 30 games per second.

  If special notification such as a bonus prize is required during the extra notification effect, the extra notification effect is stopped, and after the special notification such as the end of the bonus is completed, the additional notification effect is resumed. That is, when special notification becomes necessary during the additional notification effect, the count-up display is temporarily stopped, and after the special notification is finished, the count-up display is resumed.

  For example, when the number of additional games for ART is determined, if only the sum of the determined additional number of ART games and the remaining number of ART games is displayed, the sense of exaltation that the number of ART games has been increased is not maintained. On the other hand, when the number of additional games for ART is determined, when increasing the number of remaining ART games by count-up display, if the increasing speed is constant, it is proportional to the determined number of additional games for ART. The time required for the count-up display becomes longer. As a result, the time for performing other effects is reduced, or other effects are started during the count-up display, thereby inhibiting the effects of other effects.

  In the additional notification effect of the present embodiment, when “the number of remaining ART games” x is less than a predetermined value (for example, 10), the fluctuation value added to “the number of remaining ART games” x in one frame is: It becomes “17”. When the “remaining ART game number” x is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 27), the variation value added to the “remaining ART game number” x in one frame is “16”. Therefore, when the count-up display value is less than the predetermined value, the variation value is larger than when the count-up display value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value.

  Therefore, in the count-up display, the speed at which the numerical value increases can be changed stepwise, and the time required for the extra notification effect can be adjusted. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that maintains the exhilaration feeling that the number of ART games has been added, and it is possible to prevent the effects of other effects from being disturbed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation value in the case of “the remaining number of additional ART games” y is set to y / 100. However, as the additional notification effect according to the present invention, an expression for calculating the fluctuation value can be arbitrarily set. Further, the formula for calculating the fluctuation value is not limited to one, and may be changed according to a condition (for example, a value of “the number of additional games for the remaining ART”).

  In the present embodiment, the speed at which the numerical value increases is faster when the count-up display value is less than the predetermined value than when the count-up display value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value. However, as an additional notification effect according to the present invention, when the count-up display value is less than the predetermined value, the speed at which the value increases is slower than when the count-up display value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value. May be.

  In this embodiment, when the speed at which the numerical value increases is the slowest, the variation value added to “the number of remaining ART games” x in one frame is set to “1”. As described above, in this embodiment, since 30 frames of images are displayed per second, 30 games are added per second. However, as an additional notification effect according to the present invention, for example, when the “number of remaining ART additional games” y is 10 or less, one game may be added per second.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when notifying the value which added the number of additional games of ART to the remaining number of ART games, the additional notification effect was performed. However, the additional notification effect according to the present invention is not limited to the notification related to the number of ART games, and for example, a value obtained by adding the determined number of game media to the remaining number of game media to be notified is notified. Also good. Further, if the ART setting is continued, the value obtained by adding the number of game media acquired in the current ART to the number of game media acquired in the ART continued so far may be notified.

  Further, as an additional notification effect according to the present invention, for example, the current number of remaining ART games or the remaining number of game media to be provided at the time of returning after displaying the menu screen during ART or returning from power interruption You may perform, when displaying. In this case, the first value according to the present invention is 0, and the second value and the total value according to the present invention are the number of ART games or the remaining number of game media to be provided.

  In this embodiment, one value (the number of remaining ART games) is displayed in a count-up display. However, as an additional notification effect according to the present invention, a count-up display may be performed for a plurality of items. For example, the number of game media granted at the current ART, the total number of game media granted at the ART continued until the current ART, and the number of continued ARTs may be notified by count-up display.

  In this case, the speed at which the numerical value increases can be set according to the item to be displayed, and for example, the count-up display may be set to end simultaneously. In addition, only the item to be emphasized can be given a strong impression on the count-up display of the item to be emphasized by extremely slowing down the speed at which the numerical value in the count-up display increases.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first modification of the extra notification effect.
In the first modified example of the extra notification effect, the count-up is temporarily stopped during the count-up display, and then the count-up is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 170, when the first modified example of the additional notification effect is started, the determined “number of additional ART games” and “number of remaining ART games” are displayed on the display unit 11a. Then, a count-up display for increasing the value of the “number of remaining ART games” is performed until the “number of remaining ART games after adding” is reached from the “number of remaining ART games”. At this time, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the variation value is calculated according to the “number of additional ARTs to be added”, and the speed at which the numerical value increases is gradually decreased.

  Then, when the “number of remaining ART games” approaches a specific value, the speed at which the numerical value increases is further reduced. For example, when the specific value is set to “1000” and the “number of remaining ART games” reaches “990”, the speed at which the numerical value increases is extremely slow, and the “number of remaining ART games” is “ When reaching “1000”, the count-up is paused. After that, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation value is calculated according to the “number of remaining ART addition games”, and the speed at which the numerical value increases is gradually decreased.

  In the first modified example of the extra notification effect, a very happy situation for the player that the “number of remaining ART games” has reached four digits of 1000 can be made an effect that gives a stronger impression. Therefore, the specific value according to the first modified example is preferably a numerical value such as 100 or 500 that serves as one standard for the player.

  When the “number of remaining ART games” reaches a specific value, sound effects may be output from the speakers 20L and 20R. As a result, it is possible to effectively impress a situation that is pleasing to the technician. In addition, when the “number of remaining ART games” reaches a specific value and the count-up is temporarily stopped, a character “shutter chance!” That prompts the player to take a picture may be displayed. As a result, the player's satisfaction can be enhanced.

  The specific value according to the first modification may be a value that suggests or informs the player of the current situation, and may be set to 456, 777, for example. For example, when the specific value is set to 456, it is suggested or notified that the set value is 4, 5, or 6, and when the specific value is set to 777, it is suggested that the bonus is won or Inform.

FIG. 171 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second modification of the extra notification effect.
The second modified example of the extra notification effect has a limiter function for terminating ART when the number of ART games digested after starting ART reaches a predetermined number (limiter value) in order to suppress excessive gambling. Applies to existing gaming machines.

  As shown in FIG. 171, in the second modification, the predetermined number is set to 1500, and when the number of ART games digested after starting ART reaches 1500, ART is terminated. For example, it is assumed that the number of ART games that have been digested is 100, the remaining number of ART games is 1000, and the determined number of additional games is 600.

  The total value of the number of digested ART games, the number of remaining ART games, and the determined number of additional games is 1700. Here, even if 1600 is notified as the number of remaining ART games after performing the above-described additional notification effect, if the additional number of ART games is not determined thereafter, the remaining number of ART games becomes 200. Will end ART. As a result, the player recognizes that 200 ART games have been discarded by the limiter function, and the player feels lost.

  Therefore, in the second modification, when the total value of the number of ART games that have been digested, the number of remaining ART games, and the determined number of additional games for ART exceeds a predetermined number, The number of games is corrected and displayed (notified) so as not to exceed a predetermined number. In the above example, 400 is displayed instead of 600 as the determined number of additional games for ART. In this case, the variation value is calculated by setting the “number of remaining ART addition games” to 400, and the speed at which the numerical value increases is gradually decreased.

  Thus, even if a value smaller than the determined number of additional games for ART is displayed, the player does not know the number of additional games for ART determined to be executed, and therefore the player whose ART game number has been truncated has been discarded. Can be made not to be recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a loss.

  In the second modification, the number of ART games is used as a condition for activating the limiter function. However, as a condition for activating the limiter function, for example, the number of games during the bonus operation and the number of games from the bonus winning until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is stopped (so-called inside bonus or between flags) and ART You may set about the game number which added the number of games and the number of games in a bonus. In addition, a condition for the limiter function to be activated may be set based not on the number of games but on the net increase in the number of game media in ART or the number of payouts.

(8) Finger Touch Effect Next, a finger touch effect performed using the touch input unit 331a will be described.
In the present embodiment, the finger touch effect is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Examples of the predetermined condition include a case where a predetermined number of games have been consumed after the ART has ended, and a case where a finger touch effect is determined to be performed by lottery.

  When the finger touch effect is executed, an image of the girl showing his index finger is displayed on the display unit 11a. The index finger in the image of the girl showing the index finger is displayed in a predetermined area on the display unit 11a. The girl's index finger displayed in the predetermined area shows a specific example of the touch operation object according to the present invention.

  When an image in which the girl puts out his index finger is displayed on the display unit 11a, a “touch” line is output from the speakers 20L and 20R. When a player performs a long tap operation on a predetermined area where a girl's index finger is displayed and five seconds have elapsed, a line “I am fine” is output from the speakers 20L and 20R. Output from the speakers 20 </ b> L and 20 </ b> R is a specific example of the first response effect according to the present invention, and 5 seconds is a specific example of the first period according to the present invention. Show.

  As the first response effect, an effect suggesting the end of an operation (touch operation) of touching a predetermined area with a finger is preferable. If the player finishes the long tap operation before 10 seconds have passed after the line “I'm fine” is output from the speakers 20L and 20R, the finger touch effect is ended. The 10 seconds indicate a specific example of the second period according to the present invention.

  On the other hand, if a long tap operation is continued until 10 seconds have elapsed after the line “I'm fine” is output from the speakers 20L and 20R, an image embarrassed by the girl with the index finger displayed is displayed. The combined lines are output from the speakers 20L and 20R. Outputting from the speakers 20L and 20R the image that the girl who has put out his index finger is embarrassed and the words corresponding to it show a specific example of the second response effect according to the present invention.

  The appearance of the second response effect is a task (issue) for the player who has started the above-mentioned unimemo. Therefore, when the second response effect appears, the mission of Unimemo is cleared, and a privilege is granted when the finger touch effect is cleared. As a privilege at the time of clearing the finger touch effect, for example, an image of a character related to the gaming machine is given to a player who has started the above-mentioned uni-memo, and a costume of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 can be changed. And so on.

  The privilege at the time of clearing the finger touch effect according to the present invention is not limited to that given to the player who has started Unimemo, and may be given to all players. The privilege at the time of clearing the finger touch effect according to the present invention may be, for example, increasing the types of music (BGM) that can be output during the first ART or the second ART. In addition, although the privilege which does not affect the game result of the pachislot 1 is preferable as the privilege at the time of clearing the finger touch effect, it is not limited to this, and for example, the above-described causal value may be given.

  In the finger touch effect, when a long tap operation is performed on a predetermined area where a girl's index finger is displayed and five seconds (first period) have elapsed, a line “I'm fine” is output from the speakers 20L and 20R (first A response effect is executed). If the long tap operation is not continued until another 10 seconds (second period) elapses, an image embarrassed by the girl with the index finger displayed is displayed, and a corresponding line is output from the speakers 20L and 20R. (The second response effect is not executed).

  Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice the presence of the second response effect, and the player who has found the second response effect can have a sense of superiority. Then, it is possible to stimulate the search for the effect using the touch sensor module, and to improve the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module.

  The first response effect suggests the end of an operation (touch operation) of touching a predetermined area with a finger. Thereby, discovery of the second response effect can be made difficult, the player who has found the second response effect can be amazed, and the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the first response effect is an effect that suggests the end of an operation of touching a predetermined area with a finger (touch operation). However, the first response effect according to the present invention is not limited to the effect suggesting the end of the operation of touching the finger (touch operation). For example, when the execution of the finger touch effect reaches a predetermined number of times after starting the unimemo, the effect may be changed to an effect suggesting the second response effect.

  In the present embodiment, the first period is set to 5 seconds, and the second period is set to 10 seconds. However, the first period and the second period according to the present invention can be set to arbitrary periods. Note that the second period is preferably equal to or longer than the first period. In this case, it becomes difficult to find the second response effect, and the rare value of finding the second response effect can be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the image of the girl's index finger was employ | adopted as a touch operation target object, arbitrary images are employable as a touch operation target object which concerns on this invention. In this embodiment, one predetermined area for detecting touch input information is provided. However, two or more predetermined areas for detecting touch input information according to the present invention may be provided.

  When two or more predetermined areas for detecting touch input information are provided, the second response effect may be executed when the touch input information is continuously detected in at least one of the areas. In this case, even if the long tap operation (touch operation) is continued, an area where the second response effect is not executed can be provided, and the rare value of finding the second response effect is further increased, and the finger touch effect is generated. Can improve the interest of

  The gaming machine according to the first to third embodiments of the present invention has been described above including its effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and it goes without saying that various embodiments are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when “bonus winning” is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of “SBB”, “BB”, and “RB” is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, either “SBB or BB” or “RB” is determined by bonus distribution lottery, and either “SBB” or “BB” is determined at the end of the precursor game. May be.

  In the above embodiment, when the “SBB” or “BB” precursor game is being played, the “BB precursor flag” is turned on. In other words, the operating states of the “SBB” and “BB” precursor games are managed by the “BB precursor flag”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which the “SBB” precursor flag and the “BB” precursor flag are provided separately from each other. In this case, the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “SBB” and the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “BB” may be different from each other.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, it complete | finishes on condition that the 1st ART ("SBB", "BB", "RB") and the 2nd ART have digested the game of the number of staying games, respectively. However, the first ART and the second ART according to the present invention may be configured to end on condition that a predetermined number of navigations (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed.

  In the above embodiment, the number of stay games of “SBB” in the first ART is fixed to “100”. However, “SBB” according to the present invention may have a configuration in which the number of staying games is added to (added to) the number of staying games in “SBB”, similarly to “BB”.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the number of games which produce additional addition A, B, and C which may generate | occur | produce by BR was fixed to "2." That is, when the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, “2” is set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for performing the additional additions A, B, and C according to the present invention may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional added game number counter may be varied according to the type of additional added effect (addition added A, B, C).

  In the above-described various embodiments and various modifications, for example, lottery processing (for example, internal lottery processing, etc.) and control processing related to the progress of the game are performed by the main control board 41 (main control unit) and related to effect control. The example in which the lottery process (for example, the AT lottery process) and the control process to be performed are performed by the sub-control board 42 (sub-control unit) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, some or all of the various lottery processes and various control processes performed on the sub-control board 42 in the various embodiments and various modifications may be performed on the main control board 41. Also, for example, some or all of the various lottery processes and various control processes performed on the main control board 41 in the various embodiments and various modifications may be performed on the sub control board 42.

  Further, in the various embodiments and various modifications described above, a stop for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination serving as an end condition during preparation, and a combination of symbols corresponding to a small combination in BB, RB, and ART. The order navigation was notified by the liquid crystal display device 11. In other words, it is information that causes a clear difference in the acquisition performance of the game medium, and the instruction information that is information that can identify the pressing order of the reels (stop button) and the pressing position of the specific reel (the symbol position to be stopped), The liquid crystal display device 11 controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 has notified.

  However, as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the device controlled by the main control circuit may notify the instruction information. As an apparatus controlled by the main control circuit, for example, the above-mentioned 7-segment display 23 (see FIG. 7) can be cited, but a dedicated instruction monitor for informing the instruction information may be used. The instruction information may be performed by both the liquid crystal display device 11 controlled by the sub control circuit 101 and the device controlled by the main control circuit.

<Appendix (summary of the present invention)>
[First to seventh gaming machines]
A general gaming machine includes a cabinet and a front door attached to the cabinet so as to be opened and closed. The front door is provided with a plurality of effect devices such as a lamp unit, a speaker, a display device, and a touch sensor module. As a touch sensor module, a coordinate detection device is known (see, for example, JP 2009-277047 A).

  The touch sensor module mounted on the gaming machine is provided so as to overlap with the display unit of the display device, for example. In a gaming machine equipped with such a touch sensor module, the player can directly touch the display unit of the display device to perform an intuitive input operation. Further, by adopting the surface-type capacitance method as the touch sensor module, an input device using the touch sensor can be manufactured at a low cost with a simple configuration.

  As a gaming machine equipped with a touch sensor module, there is known a gaming machine that determines the content of an effect based on the detected position when the position touched by the player is detected by the touch sensor module (for example, JP 2009-261605 A). In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-261605, it is possible to select an effect performed in the following game by touching a desired selection image during a period in which a plurality of selection images are displayed. it can.

  However, there is room for improvement in the effect using the touch sensor module, and it is desired to improve the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above first problem, and a first object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of improving the interest of production using a touch sensor module. is there.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information;
An effect device (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later) provided separately from the display device,
A first display object (for example, an animal image 351 described later) is displayed in a first area in the display unit that overlaps with the touch sensor module of the display device, and the display unit that overlaps with the touch sensor module of the display device. In the effect of displaying the second display object (for example, a girl image 352 described later) in the second area of
It is determined whether or not to execute a response effect (for example, a later-described dialog effect) for each area,
Thereafter, when the touch input information corresponding to the area determined to execute the response effect is detected, at least one of the display device and the effect device executes the response effect,
In the determination as to whether or not to execute the response effect, the ratio at which the response effect is determined is different between the first area and the second area.

  The present invention also provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module (for example, touch sensor module 31 to be described later) that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information;
An effect device (for example, touch sensor module 31 described later) provided separately from the display device,
A first display object (for example, an animal image 351 described later) is displayed in a first area in the display unit that overlaps with the touch sensor module of the display device, and the display unit that overlaps with the touch sensor module of the display device. In the production of the second display object (for example, a later-described girl image 352 described later) in the second area of
When the touch input information corresponding to the first area and the second area is detected, a response effect by at least one of the display device and the effect device (for example, a video effect in which an animal image 351 described later operates) ) Is feasible and
As the response effect, there is a specific response effect executed by both the display device and the effect device (for example, a video effect in which an animal image 351 described later operates and a serif effect that outputs a serif),
The rate at which the specific response effect is determined differs between when the touch input information corresponding to the first area is detected and when the touch input information corresponding to the second area is detected. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The present invention also provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module (for example, touch sensor module 31 to be described later) that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information;
An effect device (for example, touch sensor module 31 described later) provided separately from the display device,
A first display object (for example, an animal image 351 described later) is displayed in a first area in the display unit that overlaps with the touch sensor module of the display device, and the display unit that overlaps with the touch sensor module of the display device. In the production of the second display object (for example, a later-described girl image 352 described later) in the second area of
When the touch input information corresponding to the first area and the second area is detected, a response effect by at least one of the display device and the effect device (for example, a video effect in which an animal image 351 described later operates) ) Is feasible and
As the response effect, there is a specific response effect executed by both the display device and the effect device (for example, a video effect in which an animal image 351 described later operates and a serif effect that outputs a serif),
The rate at which the specific response effect is determined differs between when the touch input information corresponding to the first area is detected and when the touch input information corresponding to the second area is detected. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the first gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, a response effect is performed when touch input information corresponding to the first area is detected and when touch input information corresponding to the second area is detected. The rate at which is determined is different. Thereby, a player can select the frequency with which a response effect is performed, and the interest of the effect using a touch sensor module can be improved.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information;
A gaming machine comprising
Touch coordinates are acquired based on the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module, a predetermined image (for example, a black eyelid image 354 described later) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates, and goal coordinates ( For example, an angle of a line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates with respect to a line substantially perpendicular to one side of the display unit (for example, an upper side of the display unit 11a described later) near the center of the decoration unit 321 described later. And a video in which the predetermined image advances toward the goal coordinates is displayed based on the angle.

  In the second gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, an image that advances from the touch coordinates toward the goal coordinates can be displayed no matter what point is touched, and the entertainment using the touch sensor module is improved. Can be made.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit of the display device and detects touch input information;
A gaming machine comprising
Touch coordinates are acquired based on the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module, a predetermined image (for example, a black eyelid image 354 described later) is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates, and goal coordinates ( For example, an angle of a line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates with respect to a line substantially perpendicular to one side of the display unit (for example, an upper side of the display unit 11a described later) near the center of the decoration unit 321 described later. And displaying a video in which the predetermined image advances toward the goal coordinates based on the angle,
The predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined appearance mode (for example, a circular shape described later) in the predetermined area until a predetermined period elapses after the touch input information is detected. Gaming machine.

  In the third gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, an image that advances from the touch coordinates toward the goal coordinates can be displayed no matter what point is touched. In addition, since the predetermined image is displayed in a low appearance area including the touch coordinates in a predetermined appearance mode, it is possible to make it appear as if the predetermined image has appeared from the finger, improving the interest of the production using the touch sensor module Can be made.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification image (for example, a predetermined notification image 356 described later) is displayed on the display unit, and the touch input information (for example, a pinch-out operation described later) detected by the touch sensor module is displayed. ) To change the transparency of the predetermined notification image.

  In the fourth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, since the transparency of the predetermined notification image changes based on the touch input information, the predetermined notification image can be recognized or disabled. The interest of the production using the sensor module can be improved.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information;
An operation means (for example, an effect button 322 described later) different from the touch sensor module,
When notifying the player that a privilege is to be given, based on the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module or the player's operation detected by the operation means, the initial dimension is changed in a predetermined direction. An inflating image (for example, an inflating target image 371 described later) is displayed.

  In the fifth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, the expanded image can be expanded by performing an operation on the operation means instead of the input operation touching the display unit. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy an effect using the touch sensor module without performing an input operation to touch the display unit.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit of the display device and detects touch input information;
An operation means (for example, an effect button 322 described later) different from the touch sensor module,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification image (for example, a predetermined notification image 356 described later) is displayed on the display unit, and the touch input information (for example, a pinch-out operation described later) detected by the touch sensor module is displayed. ) Or the transparency of the predetermined notification image is changed based on the player's operation (for example, a long press described later) detected by the operation means.

  In the sixth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, the transparency of the predetermined notification image can be changed by performing an operation on the operation means instead of the input operation touching the display unit. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy an effect using the touch sensor module without performing an input operation to touch the display unit.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information;
An effect device (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later) provided separately from the display device,
A touch operation object (for example, described later) is displayed in a predetermined area in the display unit that overlaps with the touch sensor module of the display device, and the touch input information corresponding to the predetermined area is detected until a first period elapses. When it is continuously performed, the first response effect is executed by at least one of the display device and the effect device, and the touch corresponding to the predetermined area is performed until the second period elapses after the first response effect is executed. When the input information continues to be detected, a second response effect is executed by at least one of the display device and the effect device.

  In the seventh gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the second response effect, and to give the player a sense of superiority who has found the second response effect. Then, it is possible to stimulate the search for the effect using the touch sensor module, and to improve the interest of the effect using the touch sensor module.

[Eighth game machine]
As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that determines an effect content based on a detected position when a position touched by a player is detected by a touch sensor module (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-2009). 261605). In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-261605, it is possible to select an effect performed in the following game by touching a desired selection image during a period in which a plurality of selection images are displayed. it can.

  However, the method of selecting an effect as described in Patent Document 1 is simple, and it has been difficult to improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above second problem, and a second object of the present invention is to improve the entertainment selection method by improving the method of selecting effects. Is to provide.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
An effect device (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later) provided separately from the display device;
Operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, touch sensor module described later),
Prior to the start of a special period (for example, a period from the start to the end of BB described later), a sound effect selection image (for example, for selecting a type of sound effect (for example, BGM described later)) on the display unit. , A BGM selection image 362 described later) and a notification effect selection image (for example, a notification effect selection image 361 described later) for selecting the type of notification effect,
The type of the sound effect and the notification effect can be selected based on the operation of the operation means,
In the special period, the selected sound effect is output by the effect device, and when the specific condition (for example, it has been decided to perform a chance notification effect described later) is satisfied, the selected notification effect is displayed. It displays on the said display part. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  In the eighth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, the player can freely combine the sound effect and the notification effect by selecting the type of the sound effect and the notification effect, respectively, thereby improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

[Ninth game machine]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege given to a player, a replay game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  Conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is known one that notifies a player of a game situation using a display unit that displays an image (see, for example, JP-A-2006-30102). The gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-30102 has a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”). . And the effect which alert | reports by the change of the number displayed on the liquid crystal display device that the frequency | count of navigating the formation of a specific small combination was added is performed.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the effect of notifying the player of the game situation using the display unit that displays the image, and an effect that enhances the visual effect is desired.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above third problem, and a third object of the present invention is to enhance the visual effect of the effect of notifying the game situation using the display device, and to enhance the game. It is providing the technique which can suppress the fall of this.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later),
When a privilege (for example, the number of additional games to be described later in ART) is given to the player, an expansion image (for example, an expansion target image 371 to be described later) that expands in a predetermined direction from the initial dimension based on the player's operation is provided. Display on the display,
The expansion image differs in expansion rate according to the size or type of a privilege given to a player.

  In the ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, since the expansion rate of the expansion image varies depending on the size or type of the privilege, it is possible to enhance the visual effect of the effect of informing the game situation using the display device. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[10th and 11th game machines]
A general gaming machine includes a cabinet and a front door attached to the cabinet so as to be opened and closed. The front door is provided with a plurality of effect devices such as a lamp unit, a speaker, a display device, and a touch sensor module. As a touch sensor module, a coordinate detection device is known (see, for example, JP 2009-277047 A).

  The touch sensor module mounted on the gaming machine is provided so as to overlap with the display unit of the display device, for example. In a gaming machine equipped with such a touch sensor module, the player can directly touch the display unit of the display device to perform an intuitive input operation. Further, by adopting the surface-type capacitance method as the touch sensor module, an input device using the touch sensor can be manufactured at a low cost with a simple configuration.

  For example, JP-A-2015-92902 discloses a gaming machine equipped with a touch sensor module. The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92902 scrapes off scratches such as whales where the “painted” portion of the portion rubbed with a finger disappears and an image informing the player can be seen from the disappeared portion. The production is done.

  However, there is room for improvement in the effects such as scraping scratches performed by the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92902, and it is hoped to improve the interest of the effects such as scraping scratches. It is rare.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above fourth problem, and a fourth object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of improving the interest of production such as scratching. It is.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information,
When a special condition (for example, when CZ winning is described later, or when CZ winning is not determined and it is determined to perform a scratch effect by lottery) is satisfied In addition, a shielding image (for example, four shielding images 381a to 381d to be described later) is displayed in the display unit superimposed on the touch sensor module.
Based on the fact that the player has touched a predetermined area of the touch sensor module corresponding to the shielding image, at least a part of the shielding image is changed to a visibility-reducing aspect with reduced visibility, and the visibility-reducing aspect is achieved. From that point, at least a part of a predetermined effect image (for example, “this” or “×” described later) can be visually recognized,
When the player touches the predetermined area, the area where at least a part of the occlusion image can be changed to the visual degradation mode is a first area centered on the touch coordinates (for example, a first area described later). An area 382a) and a second area (for example, a second area 382b described later) farther from the center of the touch coordinates than the first area,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first area has a higher efficiency in reducing visibility of the shielded image than the second area.

  In the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, as the distance from the touched point increases, it becomes difficult to be in a visually-reduced mode, and it is possible to enhance the reality of the effect of scraping off the scratch. Thereby, the interest of the production which is scraping off the scratch can be improved.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later);
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information,
When a special condition (for example, when CZ winning is described later, or when CZ winning is not determined and it is determined to perform a scratch effect by lottery) is satisfied In addition, a shielding image (for example, four shielding images 381a to 381d to be described later) is displayed in the display unit superimposed on the touch sensor module.
Based on the fact that the player has touched a predetermined area of the touch sensor module corresponding to the shielding image, at least a part of the shielding image is changed to a visibility-reducing aspect with reduced visibility, and the visibility-reducing aspect is achieved. From that point, at least a part of a predetermined effect image (for example, “this” or “×” described later) can be visually recognized,
Touch mode management means (for example, a sub-control board 77 to be described later) that performs touch mode management including a first touch mode and a second touch mode that have different efficiencies for reducing the visibility of the shielding image;
If the player performs a special operation (for example, a pinch-out operation described later) when the special condition is satisfied, the touch mode management means changes from the first touch mode to the second touch mode. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the eleventh gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, the efficiency of reducing the visibility of the shield image can be changed by the player performing a special operation. As a result, the shield image can be easily changed to a visually-decreasing aspect, and it is possible to improve the interest of an effect such as scratching.

[Twelfth game machine]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege given to a player, a replay game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  Conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is known one that notifies a player of a game situation using a display unit that displays an image (see, for example, JP-A-2006-30102). The gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-30102 has a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”). . And the effect which alert | reports by the change of the number displayed on the liquid crystal display device that the frequency | count of navigating the formation of a specific small combination was added is performed.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the effect of notifying the player of the game situation using a display unit that displays an image, and it is desired to enhance the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the fifth problem, and a fifth object of the present invention is to improve the effect of notifying the game situation by using the display device and to enhance the interest of the game. Is to provide a technology that can.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device having a display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later),
The display device informs that a first value (for example, “art number of additional games to be described later”) is added to a second value (for example, “number of remaining ART games to be described later”). Display
The addition notification display is a count-up display that increases a numerical value until reaching a total value obtained by adding the first value to the second value (for example, “the number of remaining ART games after addition” described later). And
The speed at which the numerical value of the count-up display increases is such that the remaining value obtained by subtracting the amount already added to the first value from the second value is less than a predetermined value (for example, “the number of remaining ART games” described later is 10). ) And the case where the remaining value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “the number of remaining ART games” described later is 27).

  In the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, by changing the speed at which the numerical value in the count-up display increases, it is possible to achieve an effect that gives an exhilarating feeling and to adjust the time required for the effect. Can enhance the interest of

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi-slot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4L ... Left display window, 4C ... Middle display window, 4R DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS ... Right display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display device, 16 ... Start lever, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 41 ... Main control board, 42 ... Sub control board, 93 ... Main CPU 102 CPU

Claims (1)

A display device having a display unit;
A touch sensor module that is provided over at least a part of the display unit and detects touch input information;
A gaming machine comprising
Touch coordinates are acquired based on the touch input information detected by the touch sensor module, a predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined area including the touch coordinates, and substantially perpendicular to one side of the display unit near the goal coordinates. Calculating an angle of a line connecting the touch coordinates and the goal coordinates with respect to a straight line, and displaying an image in which the predetermined image advances toward the goal coordinates based on the angles;
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined appearance mode in the predetermined area until a predetermined period elapses after the touch input information is detected.